Lenze protec HighLine 8400 Reference Manual
  1. Manuals
  2. Brands
  3. Lenze Manuals
  4. Inverter
  5. protec HighLine 8400
  6. Reference manual

Lenze protec HighLine 8400 Reference Manual

Inverter drives
Hide thumbs
1
2
Table Of Contents
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74
75
76
77
78
79
80
81
82
83
84
85
86
87
88
89
90
91
92
93
94
95
96
97
98
99
100
101
102
103
104
105
106
107
108
109
110
111
112
113
114
115
116
117
118
119
120
121
122
123
124
125
126
127
128
129
130
131
132
133
134
135
136
137
138
139
140
141
142
143
144
145
146
147
148
149
150
151
152
153
154
155
156
157
158
159
160
161
162
163
164
165
166
167
168
169
170
171
172
173
174
175
176
177
178
179
180
181
182
183
184
185
186
187
188
189
190
191
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
200
201
202
203
204
205
206
207
208
209
210
211
212
213
214
215
216
217
218
219
220
221
222
223
224
225
226
227
228
229
230
231
232
233
234
235
236
237
238
239
240
241
242
243
244
245
246
247
248
249
250
251
252
253
254
255
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
263
264
265
266
267
268
269
270
271
272
273
274
275
276
277
278
279
280
281
282
283
284
285
286
287
288
289
290
291
292
293
294
295
296
297
298
299
300
301
302
303
304
305
306
307
308
309
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
319
320
321
322
323
324
325
326
327
328
329
330
331
332
333
334
335
336
337
338
339
340
341
342
343
344
345
346
347
348
349
350
351
352
353
354
355
356
357
358
359
360
361
362
363
364
365
366
367
368
369
370
371
372
373
374
375
376
377
378
379
380
381
382
383
384
385
386
387
388
389
390
391
392
393
394
395
396
397
398
399
400
401
402
403
404
405
406
407
408
409
410
411
412
413
414
415
416
417
418
419
420
421
422
423
424
425
426
427
428
429
430
431
432
433
434
435
436
437
438
439
440
441
442
443
444
445
446
447
448
449
450
451
452
453
454
455
456
457
458
459
460
461
462
463
464
465
466
467
468
469
470
471
472
473
474
475
476
477
478
479
480
481
482
483
484
485
486
487
488
489
490
491
492
493
494
495
496
497
498
499
500
501
502
503
504
505
506
507
508
509
510
511
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
523
524
525
526
527
528
529
530
531
532
533
534
535
536
537
538
539
540
541
542
543
544
545
546
547
548
549
550
551
552
553
554
555
556
557
558
559
560
561
562
563
564
565
566
567
568
569
570
571
572
573
574
575
576
577
578
579
580
581
582
583
584
585
586
587
588
589
590
591
592
593
594
595
596
597
598
599
600
601
602
603
604
605
606
607
608
609
610
611
612
613
614
615
616
617
618
619
620
621
622
623
624
625
626
627
628
629
630
631
632
633
634
635
636
637
638
639
640
641
642
643
644
645
646
647
648
649
650
651
652
653
654
655
656
657
658
659
660
661
662
663
664
665
666
667
668
669
670
671
672
673
674
675
676
677
678
679
680
681
682
683
684
685
686
687
688
689
690
691
692
693
694
695
696
697
698
699
700
701
702
703
704
705
706
707
708
709
710
711
712
713
714
715
716
717
718
719
720
721
722
723
724
725
726
727
728
729
730
731
732
733
734
735
736
737
738
739
740
741
742
743
744
745
746
747
748
749
750
751
752
753
754
755
756
757
758
759
760
761
762
763
764
765
766
767
768
769
770
771
772
773
774
775
776
777
778
779
780
781
782
783
784
785
786
787
788
789
790
791
792
793
794
795
796
797
798
799
800
801
802
803
804
805
806
807
808
809
810
811
812
813
814
815
816
817
818
819
820
821
822
823
824
825
826
827
828
829
830
831
832
833
834
835
836
837
838
839
840
841
842
843
844
845
846
847
848
849
850
851
852
853
854
855
856
857
858
859
860
861
862
863
864
865
866
867
868
869
870
871
872
873
874
875
876
877
878
879
880
881
882
883
884
885
886
887
888
889
890
891
892
893
894
895
896
897
898
899
900
901
902
903
904
905
906
907
908
909
910
911
912
913
914
915
916
917
918
919
920
921
922
923
924
925
926
927
928
929
930
931
932
933
934
935
936
937
938
939
940
941
942
943
944
945
946
947
948
949
950
951
952
953
954
955
956
957
958
959
960
961
962
963
964
965
966
967
968
969
970
971
972
973
974
975
976
977
978
979
980
981
982
983
984
985
986
987
988
989
990
Table of Contents

Advertisement

Quick Links

Download this manual
Inverters
8400
E84DHxxxx...
Inverter Drives 8400 protec HighLine
Reference manual
EN
_ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _
L

Advertisement

Table of Contents
loading
Need help?

Need help?

Do you have a question about the protec HighLine 8400 and is the answer not in the manual?

Questions and answers

Subscribe to Our Youtube Channel

Related Manuals for Lenze protec HighLine 8400

Summary of Contents for Lenze protec HighLine 8400

  • Page 1 Inverters 8400 E84DHxxxx... Inverter Drives 8400 protec HighLine Reference manual _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _...
  • Page 2  SW 8400 protec StateLine/HighLine  chapter "Commissioning"  chapter "Diagnostics & error management"  Remote maintenance manual Networking  KHB for the communication medium used Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 3: Table Of Contents

    Changing the parameterisation with the keypad _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 2.3.2 Change parameter settings with PC and Lenze software _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 2.3.3 Save parameter settings in the memory module safe against mains failure _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 2.3.4...
  • Page 4 Load Lenze setting _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _...
  • Page 5 Basic settings _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 5.9.3.1 Parameterising the encoder/feedback system _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 6 5.14.14 Encoder open-circuit monitoring _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 7 Possibilities for the position selection _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 8 Interface to safety system _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 8.2.5 Consideration of residual value in case of external profile calculation _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 9 Requesting the operating mode _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 10 Operation without mains supply _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 11 Parameterising the inverter as CAN master _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 12 I/O status information _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 13 Change online display format _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1189 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 14 Physical state variables _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1251 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 15 18.1.65 L_Counter_2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1307 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 16 18.1.101 L_LimitPhi_3 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1382 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 17 18.1.133 L_Or5_2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1438 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 18 18.1.169 L_Transient_2 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1503 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 19 "Switch-off positioning" technology application _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1550 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 20 Your opinion is important to us _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 1580 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 21: About This Documentation

    »Engineer«.  Tip! Information and tools regarding the Lenze products can be found on the Internet: http://www.Lenze.com  Download Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 22: Document History

    02/2011 TD05 Error corrections & supplements 12/2010 TD05 Extended by new functions for 8400 protec HighLine V06.00.00 02/2010 TD05 First edition, parameter reference V02.00.00 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 23: Conventions Used

    Step-by-step instructions are indicated by a pictograph.  All information that only applies to or from a certain software version of the inverter is marked accordingly in this documentation. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 24: Terminology Used

    Note: Use the diagnosis terminal for the 8400 protec HighLine inverter. The diagnosis terminal combines the keypad with a housing and a connecting cable. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 25 Data are exchanged between the PC (USB connection) and the inverter (diagnostic interface on the front) via the diagnostic adapter. • Order designation: E94AZCUS VFCplus Abbreviation for Voltage Frequency Control Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 26: Definition Of The Notes Used

    Application notes Pictograph Signal word Meaning Note! Important note to ensure trouble-free operation  Tip! Useful tip for easy handling  Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 27: Introduction: Parameterising The Inverter

    Certain device commands or settings which may cause critical states of drive behaviour constitute exceptions. Such parameter changes are only possible if the inverter is inhibited. Otherwise, a corresponding error message will be issued. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 28  Signal flow of the integrated technology application (see the following subchapter)  Signal outputs for status and actual value signals [2-1] Adaptation of the drive solution via parameter setting Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 29: Integrated Technology Applications

     Detailed information on each technology application can be found in the main chapter entitled "Technology applications". ( 375) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 30: Purpose Of The Technology Applications

    • the end customer wants to build upon the know-how of Lenze.  Tip! If the end customer of the machine does not want to use ready-made solutions of Lenze, it is also possible from the "HighLine" version onwards to implement individual drive solutions by means of the "free interconnection".

  • Page 31: Technology Application = Function Block Interconnection

    "Working with the FB Editor". ( 1170) • All available function and system blocks are described in the main chapter "Function library". ( 1222) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 32: Selection Of The Appropriate Commissioning Tool

     Download  Software Downloads For communication between PC and inverter, the USB diagnostic adapter can be used for instance (see the following subchapter). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 33: Overview: Accessories For Commissioning

    • Connecting cables can be selected in various lengths: Connecting cable for 2.5 m length EWL0070 USB diagnostic adapter 5 m length EWL0071 10 m length EWL0072 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 34: General Notes On Parameters

    • Configuration parameters: For configuring signal connections and terminal assignments. • Diagnostic/display parameters: For displaying device-internal process factors, current actual values and status messages. These are read-only parameters. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 35: Changing The Parameterisation With The Keypad

    Parameter can only be changed when the inverter is inhibited.  Change parameter setting Accept change in the inverter    (change to editing mode) (no saving with mains failure protection  Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 36 "Userlevel" in C00001/1: • Standard user level (Lenze setting): Only the most important menus and codes are displayed in the keypad. • Expert user level: All menus and codes are displayed in the keypad.
  • Page 37 • Use the  function key to leave the editing EDIT mode without accepting the change. Fixed setpoint 2 C00039/002 60.00 % [2-2] Example: Changing parameters with the keypad Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 38: Change Parameter Settings With Pc And Lenze Software

    Detailed information on how to handle the »Engineer« can be found in the integrated online help that you can call with the [F1] function key. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 39: Save Parameter Settings In The Memory Module Safe Against Mains Failure

    General information • In the delivery state, the Lenze setting of the parameters has been saved to the integrated memory module. These parameters are • the parameters of the inverter •...
  • Page 40 (firmware) version. The software version of the inverter can be seen on the nameplate in the "SW" line and can be determined by reading out code C00099. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 41 Software versions for devices with a power up to 4 kW • V02.xx • V06.xx • V07.xx • V08.xx Software version for devices with a power from 7.5 kW • V12.xx Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 42: User Menu For Quick Access To Frequently Used Parameters

    Then, all other parameters cannot be accessed without knowing the password and are thus protected against unwanted changes. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 43: Device Access Protection

    • Inform the end customer that Lenze can only provide restricted service for the devices with access protection. • It is not possible for Lenze to modify a replacement device via special accesses in such a way that it cooperates with a personalised memory module.

  • Page 44: Password Protection

    Bit 1 Parameter write protection Bit 2 Parameter read protection Bit 3 ... 14 Reserved Bit 16 Memory module binding on Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 45 2. Execute "Delete password" device command C00002/33 = "1: On / start" • After a successful deletion, password status OFF is displayed in C00505/3. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 46: Device Personalisation

    Binding ID is set. Device commands Before the following device commands are executed, enter the corresponding binding ID in C00505/2. Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 47 (0 - 9). 2. Execute "Set binding ID" device command C00002/29 = "1: On / start" • After successful execution, status ON is displayed in C00505/2. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 48: Unlocking The Inverter With A Masterpin

     Stop! When the MasterPin is used, the parameter set is reset to the Lenze setting both in the inverter and in the memory module! • This results in a permanent loss of the customised parameterisation that must be recreated! •...

  • Page 49: Device Identification

    These additional subcodes are not dependent on the previously described text acceptance mechanism in the »Engineer« for the device name (C00199/1). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 50: Commissioning

    8400 hardware manual. The hardware manual has been stored in electronic form on the data carrier supplied with the 8400 inverter. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 51: Safety Instructions With Regard To Commissioning

    (nameplate data: 400 V /230 V ) is to be operated in conjunction with an   inverter for a mains voltage of 400 V. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 52: Commissioning Notes For External 24 V Supply

    The disconnection of the 24 V supply in the case of an available 400 V mains voltage can cause an error status for master controls. Related topics: LED status displays ( 590) Drive diagnostics via the integrated 7-segment display ( 593) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 53: Notes On Motor Control

    • If a high torque must be provided at small speeds without feedback: Select "Sensorless vector control (SLVC) as motor control mode in C00006. Related topics: Motor control (MCTRL) ( 132) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 54: Preconditions For Commissioning With The "Engineer

    • Requesting the CDYou can also request the »Engineer« separately on CD free of charge at your Lenze representative. See the "About Lenze" area on our homepage for e.g. the corresponding German address. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 55: Trouble-Shooting During Commissioning

    This function extension is supported by the »Engineer« from version 2.15 onwards! The commissioning wizard 8400 serves to carry out a guided commissioning of the inverter based on the Lenze setting of the parameters. The set parameters can then be saved in the inverter with mains failure protection.
  • Page 56 • The Next button can only be activated again after all parameter settings in the device have been reset via the Load Lenze setting button. Related topics: Commissioning of the "Actuating drive speed" technology application ( 57) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 57: Commissioning Of The "Actuating Drive Speed" Technology Application

    Parameterising the motor control ( 60) Parameterise application ( 61) Save parameter settings safe against mains failure ( 63) Enable inverter and test application ( 63) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 58: Prepare Inverter For Commissioning

    Related topics: Commissioning notes for external 24 V supply ( 52) Automatic restart after mains connection/fault... ( 122) LED status displays ( 590) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 59: Creating An "Engineer" Project & Going Online

    Disable inverter. Download parameter set. • This command serves to overwrite the current parameter settings in the inverter by parameter settings of the »Engineer« project. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 60: Parameterising The Motor Control

    Vmin boost 1.60 % Adapting the Vmin boost ( 166) (C00016) Related topics: Notes on motor control ( 53) Motor control (MCTRL) ( 132) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 61: Parameterise Application

    • For a detailed description see the L_MPot_1 function block. ( 1394) • Go to the parameterisation dialog of the motor potentiometer via the Motor potentiometer button. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 62 Process data assignment for fieldbus communication ( 397) Terminal assignment of the control modes ( 388) Setting parameters (short overview) ( 399) Configuration parameters ( 401) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 63: Save Parameter Settings Safe Against Mains Failure

    Other control functions in the "Terminal 0" control mode: • DI3: HIGH level ≡ Request DC-injection braking • DI4: HIGH level ≡ Request a change of direction of rotation Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 64 _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Related topics: "Inhibit at power-on" auto-start option ( 122) Trouble-shooting during commissioning ( 55) Diagnostics & error management ( 589) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 65: Commissioning Of The "Table Positioning" Technology Application

    Start of profile generation Diagnostic interface for connecting the USB diagnostic adapter [3-2] Block diagram for wiring the commissioning example for the "Table positioning" application Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 66: Prepare Inverter For Commissioning

    Limit switch ‚ DI4/DO2 neg. direction … n.c. ƒ  „ Profile no. 1/3 ‚ Start of profile generation … n.c. ƒ Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 67 Related topics: Commissioning notes for external 24 V supply ( 52) Automatic restart after mains connection/fault... ( 122) LED status displays ( 590) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 68: Creating An "Engineer" Project & Going Online

    Disable inverter. Download parameter set. • This command serves to overwrite the current parameter settings in the inverter by parameter settings of the »Engineer« project. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 69: Parameterising The Motor Control

    2. In the Motor control list field (C00006), select the desired motor control. Related topics: Notes on motor control ( 53) Motor control (MCTRL) ( 132) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 70: Parameterise Application

    • The corresponding wiring diagram is displayed in a pop-up window if you click the button right to the list field. • For a detailed description, see the chapter "Terminal assignment of the control modes". ( 388) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 71: Set Machine Parameters

    1. Go to the right side of the Application parameter tab and click the Machine parameter button to change to the Overview  Machine parameter dialog level: Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 72: Set The Position Encoder

    3.8.4.2 Set the position encoder In the Lenze setting, the digital input terminals are configured as "normal" digital inputs. Since in this system constellation DI1 and DI2 are used to connect a two-track position encoder, the function assignment of these two inputs must be changed accordingly.
  • Page 73 7. Click the Close button to close the parameterisation dialog again. Related topics: Digital terminals ( 332) Using DI1(5) and DI2(6) as frequency inputs ( 336) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 74: Set Homing

    3. Set the position to be used for loading the set position and the actual position after homing has finished in the Homing home position input field (C01227/2). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 75 (C01225/1) 6. After setting the parameters for the homing, click the Back button to change back to the Overview  Signal flow dialog level. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 76: Enter One Or More Profiles

    DI5. In the control modes "Terminals 2" and "Terminals 11" profiles 0 ... 3 can be selected via the digital inputs DI4 and DI5. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 77 Process data assignment for fieldbus communication ( 427) Terminal assignment of the control modes ( 418) Setting parameters (short overview) ( 429) Configuration parameters ( 430) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 78: Save Parameter Settings Safe Against Mains Failure

    Set digital input DI6 to HIGH level ("alternative function PosExecute"). 3. Complete homing when home position has been reached: Reset digital input DI6 to LOW level. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 79 "Motion Control Kernel" block. Related topics: "Inhibit at power-on" auto-start option ( 122) Trouble-shooting during commissioning ( 55) Diagnostics & error management ( 589) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 80: Commissioning Of The "Switch-Off Positioning" Technology Application

    Quick stop for CCW rotation / selection of switch-off position 2 Diagnostic interface for connecting the USB diagnostic adapter [3-3] Block diagram for wiring of the commissioning example for the "Switch-off positioning" application Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 81 Parameterising the motor control ( 84) Parameterise application ( 85) Save parameter settings safe against mains failure ( 87) Enable inverter and test application ( 87) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 82: Prepare Inverter For Commissioning

    Related topics: Commissioning notes for external 24 V supply ( 52) Automatic restart after mains connection/fault... ( 122) LED status displays ( 590) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 83: Creating An "Engineer" Project & Going Online

    Disable inverter. Download parameter set. • This command serves to overwrite the current parameter settings in the inverter by parameter settings of the »Engineer« project. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 84: Parameterising The Motor Control

    Vmin boost 1.60 % Adapting the Vmin boost ( 166) (C00016) Related topics: Notes on motor control ( 53) Motor control (MCTRL) ( 132) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 85: Parameterise Application

    • The corresponding wiring diagram is displayed in a pop-up window if you click the button right to the list field. • For a detailed description, see the chapter "Terminal assignment of the control modes". ( 388) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 86 Process data assignment for fieldbus communication ( 453) Terminal assignment of the control modes ( 444) Setting parameters (short overview) ( 455) Configuration parameters ( 457) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 87: Save Parameter Settings Safe Against Mains Failure

    LED status displays. ( 590) Related topics: "Inhibit at power-on" auto-start option ( 122) Trouble-shooting during commissioning ( 55) Diagnostics & error management ( 589) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 88: Pc Manual Control

    PC manual control must be explicitly activated by the user. If PC manual control is activated, the inverter is inhibited via device command (C00002/16) first. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 89 Click the Activate PC manual control button. • The inverter is inhibited via device command (C00002/16). • The PC manual control operator dialog is displayed. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 90 (C00002/16), i.e. the motor becomes torqueless and is coasting unless it already is at standstill. The different versions are described in the following chapters. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 91: Speed Control

    • Via the Inhibit controller button, the inverter can be inhibited again, i.e. the motor becomes torqueless and is coasting unless it already is at standstill. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 92 • Via the << CCW and CW >> buttons, the direction of rotation can be changed. • The "speed follower" operating mode can be activated via the second Positioning tab without the functions described before: Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 93: Set/Reset Home Position

    MCK status word in order that no mechanical problems occur in normal operation. • Setpoints and actual positions remain untouched until a renewed reference setting or homing. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 94: Manual Jog

    If the inverter is in the "OperationEnabled" device status: 2. Press the << Left or Right >> button (and keep it pressed) to traverse the drive with the corresponding direction of rotation. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 95: Positioning (Relative Or Absolute)

    You can find detailed information on entering profiles in the chapter entitled "Basic drive functions", subchapter "Profile entry". ( 552) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 96 If the inverter is in the "OperationEnabled" device status: 3. Press the Run POS button to start positioning. • The Stop POS serves to stop active positioning at any time. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 97: Device Control (Dctrl)

    The device states of the inverter are based on the operating states of the CiA402 standard. Device state machine and device states ( 111) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 98 C00158  Display of all active sources of a quick stop C00159  Display of the status word of the device control C00150  Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 99: Device Commands (C00002/X)

    C00002/x if the value is >1 and issue an error message. • C00003 displays the status of the device command that was executed last. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 100 »Engineer«. Before the desired action is carried out, a confirmation prompt appears first, asking whether the action is really to be carried out. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 101 (from version 06.00.00) Password protection 32 Check password static (from version 06.00.00) Password protection 33 Delete password static (from version 06.00.00) Password protection Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 102: Load Lenze Setting

    When the Lenze setting C00002/1 is loaded, all communication parameters are reset as well. After the mains is switched on, the Lenze setting is accepted and the inverter might not be accessible anymore via the communication module. From version 18.00.00...

  • Page 103: Load All Parameter Sets

    C00002/6 returns dynamic status information ("Work in progress 20 %"  "Work in progress 40 %"  "Work in progress 60 %", etc.). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 104: Save All Parameter Sets

    3.5 s 3.5 s 3.5 s EtherCAT®, PROFINET® or EtherNet/IP™ 4.0 s 3.5 s 4.0 s Ethernet POWERLINK 15.0 s 15.0 s 15.0 s Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 105: Enable/Inhibit Inverter

    Bit 12 Automatic brake operation Bit 13 DCB-IMP Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 Reserved  Tip! The inverter can also be enabled or inhibited via the toolbar icons. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 106: Activate/Deactivate Quick Stop

    Bit 5 Device command (C00002/17) Bit 6 Device error with "TroubleQSP" error response Bit 7 Internal signal Bit 8 Reserved Bit 9 Reserved Bit 10 Operating system of Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 107: Optional Settings

    If bit 4 is set in C00104/1, the position encoder is used instead of the speed encoder for quick stop with position control. • The basic conditions are shown in the Flow diagram for the quick stop function. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 108 Although the use of SSI absolute value encoders and 2-track HTL encoders is possible, the error detection system of both encoders always returns "OK" as error status ! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 109: Reset Error

    In the Logbook dialog box, it is also possible to delete all logbook entries by clicking the Delete button. Detailed information on the logbook can be found in the "Diagnostics & error management" chapter. ( 589) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 110: Device Search Function

    • Adjustable time period: 0 ... 6000 s (Lenze setting: 5 s)  Tip! The device search function can also be activated via the toolbar icon. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 111: Device State Machine And Device States

    "Warning" can occur in parallel to other device states. • The arrows between the device states mark possible state changes. • The digits stand for the status ID (see table below). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 112: Firmwareupdate

    Device statuses, priorities, and meaning of the status bits in the status word 4.2.1 FirmwareUpdate  Note! This function may only be executed by qualified Lenze personnel! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 113: Init

    If only the 24V voltage supply is available during the mains connection, the error message "LU: Undervoltage in the DC bus" is also entered into the logbook of the inverter. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 114: Ident

    • error monitoring remains active, • the inverter is controlled independently of the setpoint sources. After the motor parameter identification is completed, the status changes back to "SwitchedOn". Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 115: Safetorqueoff

    The hardware manual contains important notes on the safety system which must be observed! • The hardware manual has been stored in electronic form on the data carrier supplied with the 8400 inverter. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 116: Readytoswitchon

    If the "Inhibit at power-on" auto-start option has been deactivated in C00142, the "ReadyToSwitchOn status switches directly to the "SwitchedOn" status after mains connection. Automatic restart after mains connection/fault... ( 122) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 117: Switchedon

    (depending on C00600/1) Error with error response "Trouble" occurs. Trouble Error with error response "TroubleQSP" occurs. TroubleQSP Related topics: wCANControl/wMCIControl control words ( 128) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 118: Operationenabled

    (depending on C00600/1) Error with error response "Trouble" occurs. Trouble Error with error response "TroubleQSP" occurs. TroubleQSP Related topics: wCANControl/wMCIControl control words ( 128) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 119: Troubleqsp

    Related topics: wCANControl/wMCIControl control words ( 128) Basics on error handling in the inverter ( 589) Error messages of the operating system ( 617) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 120: Trouble

    Related topics: wCANControl/wMCIControl control words ( 128) Basics on error handling in the inverter ( 589) Error messages of the operating system ( 617) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 121: Fault

    Related topics: wCANControl/wMCIControl control words ( 128) Basics on error handling in the inverter ( 589) Error messages of the operating system ( 617) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 122: Automatic Restart After Mains Connection/Fault

    .../Error/undervoltage/loading of the Lenze setting In C00142, the starting performance of the inverter after mains connection, undervoltage, loading of the Lenze setting as well as a "Trouble" or a "Fault" reset can be parameterised individually: Auto-start option (C00142) Lenze setting Bit 0 "Inhibit at power-on"...
  • Page 123 "Inhibit at power-on" is deactivated (bit 0 = 0), the status first changes from "ReadyToSwitchOn" to "SwitchedOn" and then to "OperationEnabled" after mains connection with an enabled controller: Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 124: Auto-Start Option "Inhibit At Lenze Setting

    The "Inhibit at Lenze setting" auto-start option configurable via bit 4 of C00142 prevents the change to the "SwitchedOn" status after the Lenze setting has been loaded and the controller is enabled. For a change to the "SwitchedOn" status, the controller enable must first be deactivated after the Lenze setting has been loaded.

  • Page 125: Internal Interfaces | "Ls_Driveinterface" System Block

    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ Internal interfaces | "LS_DriveInterface" system block The LS_DriveInterface system block displays the device control in the FB Editor. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 126 Display of the status determining error (32-bit error number, High-Word) WORD wStateDetermFailNoShort Display of the status determining error (16-bit error number) WORD (from version 06.00.00) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 127 If the "Lock bFail at TroubleQSP" option is activated (bit 14 = "1") in C00148, the bFail status output is also set to TRUE if the device status is TroubleQSP. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 128: Wcancontrol/Wmcicontrol Control Words

    1 ≡ Set error (trip set) Bit 15 LenzeSpecific_4 Assignment depends on the selected technology application • See description of the corresponding technology application. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 129: Wdevicestatusword Status Word

    • E.g. if an overvoltage has occurred. Bit 14 FreeStatusBit14 Free status bit 14 (not assigned, freely assignable) Bit 15 FreeStatusBit15 Free status bit 15 (not assigned, freely assignable) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 130: Energy Saving Mode

    The functions for the energy saving mode provide the basis for implementing the PROFIenergy PROFINET profile.  Tip! Detailed information about the PROFIenergy PROFINET profile can be obtained from the PROFINET specifications. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 131 3. Via a "Pause-End" command, this operating status can be exited again. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 132: Motor Control (Mctrl)

    Position control/additive speed specification Braking operation/brake energy management Monitoring Internal interfaces (process signals): Internal interfaces | System block "LS_MotorInterface" Internal status signals | System block "LS_DeviceMonitor" Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 133: Motor Selection/Motor Data

    Automatic motor data identification ( 139) • The Encoder/feedback system... button serves to get to the settings for the encoder/feedback system, if available.Encoder/feedback system ( 277) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 134 (ASM) at certain slip speeds. Detailed information and possible remedies can be found here: Application notes for asynchronous motors with high slip speed ( 148) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 135 • the knowledge of the motor cable resistance. Both factors are determined in the course of motor parameter identification. Automatic motor data identification ( 139) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 136 VFC-ECO: Voltage reduction ramp  C00073/1 VFC: Vp Imax controller   C00077 SC: Vp field controller  C00078 SC: Tn field controller  Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 137: Selecting A Motor From The Motor Catalogue In The "Engineer

    • Go to the Application parameters tab in the Overview  Motor data dialog level and click the From motor catalogue... button to also reach the motor catalogue for the selection of another motor. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 138 These characterise the transfer behaviour of the entire controlled system. • The plant parameters depend on the application in which the inverter and motor are used. • When a Lenze motor is selected in the »Engineer«, plant parameters are suggested for this motor for a load-free operation.

  • Page 139: Automatic Motor Data Identification

    SLVC: Ti speed controller  C00070/2 SC: Vp speed controller   C00071/2 SC: Ti speed controller   C00072 SC: Tdn speed controller   Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 140 Imax in motor mode   C00497 Nact filter time constant   C00966 VFC: Time const. slip comp.  C00982 VFC-ECO: Voltage reduction ramp  Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 141 - bit 6 = "0" (Lenze setting): The field weakening controller parameters are calculated and certain special functions of the internal motor control are activated. (See table.) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 142 • Duration approx. 80 s  Tip! In the Lenze setting, a setting of "0: automatic" is selected in C02867/1. This setting ensures that the inverter automatically selects the optimum procedure for motor parameter identification. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 143 If the rated motor current amounts to less than 60 % of the rated inverter current, at least 60 % of the rated inverter current will be injected to ensure sufficient motor parameter identification accuracy. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 144 Inhibit the inverter if it is enabled, e.g. via the C00002/16 device command or a LOW signal at the X4/RFR terminal. • The motor has to be at standstill. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 145 Thanks to optimisation, the current controller can be set via the following parameters: Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00075 Vp current controller 7.00 V/A C00076 Ti current controller 10.61 ms Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 146 Another cause for the abort of the motor parameter identification could be the implausibility of the entered nameplate data, e.g. the entry P = 0 kW for the motor power. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 147 • The identification is completed if the "0: Off / ready" message is displayed in C00002/23. • After successful identification, it changes back to the "SwitchedOn" device status. 3. Inhibit inverter again. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 148: Application Notes For Asynchronous Motors With High Slip Speed

    Set the motor type ("ASM" or "PSM") manually in C01001/1. The rated motor speed does not need to be limited since the number of pole pairs can be detected safely when the motor type has been set manually. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 149: Selecting The Control Mode

    ( 153) The following section briefly describe the control modes. A reference to more details can be found at the end of each section. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 150 V/f control (VFCplus + encoder) ( 185) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 151 The servo control basically offers the same advantages as the sensorless vector control (SLVC). Servo control (SC) ( 232) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 152  Operation in motor mode (CW rotation),  Operation in generator mode (CCW rotation),  Operation in motor mode (CCW rotation),  Operation in generator mode (CW rotation) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 153: Selection Help

    Group drives (several motors connected to inverter) Identical motors and loads VFCplus Different motors and/or alternating loads VFCplus [5-2] Standard applications with speed feedback Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 154: Defining Current And Speed Limits

    The speed limitation operates with a internal hysteresis of 50 min . The upper or lower speed limit resulting from the settings has to be higher than this hysteresis! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 155 • C02864: Bit 15 = 1: nTorqueMotLimt_a acts as nTorqueHighLimit_a (positive torque limitation) and nTorqueGenLimit_a acts as nTorqueLowLimit_a (negative torque limitation). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 156 • Reduce the limitation of the torque in motor mode via nTorqueMotLimit_a (C00728/1) and the limitation of the torque in generator mode via nTorqueGenLimit_a (C00728/2). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 157: V/F Characteristic Control (Vfcplus)

    When the auto DCB threshold (C00019) is set > 0 rpm, there is no torque at the motor shaft in the lower speed range! Automatic DC-injection braking (Auto-DCB) ( 269) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 158: Parameterisation Dialog/Signal Flow

    • This dialog level only shows a simplified signal flow with the most important parameters. • When you click the >>More details button in the left-most position, a signal flow with more details/parameters is displayed. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 159 Parameters Info Parameters Info Parameters Info C00056/2 Actual torque value C00021 Slip compensation C00056/2 Actual torque value C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00051 Actual speed value C00058 Output frequency C00830/28 Limitation of torque in generator mode C00050 Speed setpoint C00006 Motor control C00054...

  • Page 160: Basic Settings

    "Optimising the control mode". ( 163) Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the chapter "Parameterisable additional functions". ( 258) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 161: Defining The V/F Characteristic Shape

    • You can find detailed information on the linear V/f characteristic with voltage reduction in the chapter entitled "V/f characteristic control - energy-saving (VFCplusEco)". ( 175) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 162: Defining Current Limits (Imax Controller)

    • If a sudden load is built up at the motor shaft (e.g. drive is blocked), the overcurrent disconnection may respond (fault message OC1 or OC11). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 163: Optimising The Control Mode

    • Adaptation of the controller parameters of the slip regulator if V/f control (VFCplus + encoder) is selected. Parameterising the slip regulator ( 189) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 164: Adapting The V/F Base Frequency

    Inverter with 230-V mains connection Motor voltage [V] Motor frequency [Hz] Motor connection V/f base frequency (C00015) 50 Hz  220 / 380 52.3 Hz  Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 165 • Generally, this process can also be used with motors which have different numbers of pole pairs. In case of 2-pole asynchronous motors, the mechanical limit speed must be maintained. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 166: Adapting The Vmin Boost

    Motor in short-time operation up to 0.5 n rated ≈ • for self-ventilated motors: I motor rated motor ≈ • for forced ventilated motors: I motor rated motor Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 167: Optimising The Imax Controller

    • overcurrent errors (e.g. OC3) occur due to load impulses or too high acceleration ramps. • Recommendation: Reduction of the gain Vp (C00073/1) and reset time Ti (C00074/1) of the controller. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 168: Optimising The Stalling Behaviour

    • The maximally permissible current and the maximum torque are reduced in the field weakening range. • The risk of motor stalling is reduced.  Note! We recommend to keep the Lenze setting (0 Hz). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 169: Torque Limitation

    (differential signal between apparent motor current and nTorqueMotLimit_a or nTorqueGenLimit_a) occurs. Above the no-load current of the motor, the accuracy of the indirect torque limitation is limited. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 170 Decel. time - quick stop C00022 Imax in motor mode C00050 Speed setpoint C00023 Imax in generator mode C00074 Ti Imax controller C00073 Vp Imax controller Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 171: Defining A User-Defined V/F Characteristic

    -20 Hz -10 Hz 0 Hz 10 Hz 20 Hz 30 Hz 40 Hz 50 Hz [5-7] Freely definable characteristic (Lenze setting for 3-phase devices) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 172 • This dialog level only shows a simplified signal flow with the most important parameters. • When you click the >>More details button in the left-most position, a signal flow with more details/parameters is displayed. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 173 Parameters Info Parameters Info Parameters Info C00056/2 Actual torque value C00021 Slip compensation C00967/x Frequency interpol. points C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00051 Actual speed value C00968/x Voltage interpol. points C00830/28 Limitation of torque in generator mode C00050 Speed setpoint C00056/2 Actual torque value...

  • Page 174: Remedies For Undesired Drive Behaviour

    (adaptation especially required for small machines) • If motor power < inverter power: C00022 to I = 2 I rated motor • Reduce dynamic performance of setpoint generation Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 175: V/F Characteristic Control - Energy-Saving (Vfcpluseco)

    65 % 75 % 2.2 kW 55 % 85 % 7.5 kW 30 % 45 % 22 kW 23 % 45 kW 21 % Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 176: Parameterisation Dialog/Signal Flow

    • This dialog level only shows a simplified signal flow with the most important parameters. • When you click the >>More details button in the left-most position, a signal flow with more details/parameters is displayed. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 177 Parameters Info Parameters Info Parameters Info C00056/2 Actual torque value C00910/1 Max. pos. output frequency C00975 VFC-ECO: Vp C00830/4 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00910/2 Max. neg. output frequency C00976 VFC-ECO: Ti C00830/5 Limitation of torque in generator mode C00021 Slip compensation C00977...

  • Page 178: Comparison Of Vfcpluseco - Vfcplus

     scaled torque in [%]  efficiency in [%]  motor voltage in [V]  power factor  electrical power in [W] [5-8] Comparison of VFCplusEco - VFCplus Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 179: Basic Settings

    "Optimising the control mode". ( 180) Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the chapter "Parameterisable additional functions". ( 258) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 180: Optimising The Control Mode

    Adapting the slope limitation for lowering the Eco function. ( 182) • Optimising the cos/phi controller. ( 182) Torque limitation Limit the torque to a lower value.Torque limitation ( 169) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 181: Improving The Behaviour At High Dynamic Load Changes

    An adaptation of the minimum voltage V/f (C00977) improves the stability in case of load impulses. • In the Lenze setting, the minimum voltage V/f is set to 20 % for the highest energy optimisation. This setting serves to respond to load torques if these amount to approx. 25 % of the rated torque or occur with low dynamics.

  • Page 182: Adapting The Slope Limitation For Lowering The Eco Function

    (The dynamics when switching off the eco function is reduced) 5.5.4.3 Optimising the cos/phi controller With the Lenze setting, the cosϕ controller is set such that usually no adaptation is required for all power ratings and application cases. Behaviour Remedy/recommendation The cosϕ...

  • Page 183: Remedies For Undesired Drive Behaviour

    Adapting the slope limitation for lowering the Eco function. ( 182) Speed variations in no-load operation for speeds > 1/3 Minimise speed oscillations with oscillation damping rated speed. (C00234). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 184 Thus, a maximum output voltage is available but the tendency to speed oscillations in the field weakening range at no-load operation and with load increases. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 185: V/F Control (Vfcplus + Encoder)

    • The change-over to "V/f emergency operation" can be suppressed by setting bit 8 to "1" in C02864/1.  The descriptions in chapter "V/f characteristic control (VFCplus)" also apply to the V/f control. ( 157) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 186: Parameterisation Dialog/Signal Flow

    • When you click the >>More details button in the left-most position, a signal flow with more details/parameters is displayed, as shown in the following subchapter. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 187 Parameters Info Parameters Info Parameters Info C00056/2 Actual torque value C00050 Speed setpoint C00058 Output frequency C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00051 Actual speed value C00006 Motor control C00830/28 Limitation of torque in generator mode C00972 Vp Vf+encoder C00830/26 MCTRL: nBoost_a C00054...

  • Page 188: Basic Settings

    V/f characteristic control (VFCplus). ( 163) Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the chapter "Parameterisable additional functions". ( 258) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 189: Parameterising The Slip Regulator

    3.33 2.00 1536 4.69 2.81 2048 6.05 3.63 3072 8.77 5.26 4096 11.49 6.90 [5-1] Slip regulator gain Vp based on the encoder increment Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 190 6. Increase the slip regulator time constant (C00973) to approx. twice the value. 7. Increase controller limitation (C00971/1) again (e.g. to twice the slip frequency). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 191 • very fast speed changes due to load, e.g. abrupt stopping of the drive due to an encounter with a stop or a load that is not moving. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 192: Sensorless Vector Control (Slvc)

    • The implementation of torque-controlled operation with speed limitation • The limitation of the maximum torque in motor and generator mode for speed-controlled operation Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 193: Parameterisation Dialog/Signal Flow

    • When you click the >>More details button in the left-most position, a signal flow with more details/parameters is displayed, as shown in the following subchapter. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 194 Parameters Info Parameters Info Parameters Info C00909/2 Max. neg. speed C00275 Setpoint feedforward control filtering C00073/2 SLVC: Vp torque controller C00909/1 Max. pos. speed C00273 Moment of inertia C00074/2 SLVC: Ti torque controller C00830/22 Speed setpoint C00022 Imax in motor mode C00084 Motor stator resistance C00105...

  • Page 195: Types Of Control

    C02864: Bit 15 = 1: negative torque limitation (nTorqueLowLimit_a)  Note! To avoid instabilities during operation, the torque limit values are internally processed as absolute values. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 196 Slip compensation The slip of the machine is reconstructed using the slip model. An influencing parameter is the slip constant (C00021). Slip compensation ( 272) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 197: Torque Control With Speed Limitation

    • Setting range: -199.99 ... 0 % • If keypad control is performed: Parameterisable via C00728/2. From version 18.00.00 onwards: C02864: Bit 15 = 1: negative torque limitation (nTorqueLowLimit_a) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 198: Basic Settings

    ( 264) Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the chapter "Parameterisable additional functions". ( 258) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 199: Optimising The Control Mode

    2. Enter a greater value for the motor rotor resistance (max. factor 2!) to reduce the magnetisation time in C00082.  Note! During the starting action, a jerk may occur in the machine due to the temporarily increased motor current! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 200: Optimise Speed Controller

    • For drive systems with a good disturbance behaviour: Vp > 15 In this case, we recommend the optimisation of the dynamic performance of the torque controller. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 201: Optimising Dynamic Performance And Field Weakening Behaviour

    5.7.4.3 Optimising dynamic performance and field weakening behaviour In the Lenze setting, the torque controller has been preset in such a way that robust and stable operation with a moderate dynamic response is enabled over the entire speed range. Retrospective optimisation of the controller parameters is not necessary.

  • Page 202: Optimising The Stalling Behaviour

    Ti <= 15 ms For applications with speeds above the 2-fold rated speed, we recommend a reset time Ti (C00074/2) > 15 ms. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 203: Optimise Response To Setpoint Changes And Determine Mass Inertia

    • The optimisation could aim at the speed controller being completely relieved (see signal characteristics in Fig. [5-12]). 5. Save the parameter set (device command: C00002/11). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 204 First the speed controller, then this additive torque is connected which is hence not derived from the differential change in speed setpoint. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 205 • Recommendation: Deactivate the torque feedforward control for the speed setpoint in C00654/1 if the reference speed C0011 is 5 times higher than the rated motor speed C0087. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 206: Slip Calculation From Motor Equivalent Circuit Diagram Data

    Automatic motor data identification ( 139) In the slip calculation from the motor equivalent circuit diagram data, the slip compensation (C00021) has no influence anymore. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 207: Optimising Field Feedforward Control And Torque Feedforward Control

    • These oscillations can be reduced by again increasing the cross current controller gain slightly in C00986.  Note! The setting of C00985 C00986 reduces the torque setting range. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 208: Remedies For Undesired Drive Behaviour

    The torque required is not generated at standstill. Increase motor magnetising current (C00095). Current overshoots occur when heavy loads are accelerated from standstill (OC1 or OC11 error). The machine runs uneven. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 209: Sensorless Control For Synchronous Motors (Slpsm)

    • The injection of a constant current may cause an unwanted heating of the motor at controlled operation. • We recommend using a temperature feedback via PTC or thermal contact. Motor temperature monitoring (PTC) ( 313) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 210: Parameterisation Dialog/Signal Flow

    Proceed as follows to open the dialog for parameterising the motor control: 1. »Engineer« Go to the Project view and select the 8400 protec HighLine inverter. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 211 • This dialog level only shows a simplified signal flow with the most important parameters. • When you click the >>More details button in the left-most position, a signal flow with more details/parameters is displayed. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 212 Parameters Info Parameters Info Parameters Info C00830/22 Speed setpoint C00909/1 Max. pos. speed C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00998/1 SLPSM: Filter time rotor position C00909/2 Max. neg. speed C00830/28 Limitation of torque in generator mode C00833/68 MCTRL: bMotorRefOffsetOn C00050 Speed setpoint C00830/24...
  • Page 213 Parameters Info Parameters Info Parameters Info C00830/27 MCTRL: nTorqueSetValue_a C00995/1 SLPSM: Open-loop controlled accelerating current C00075 Vp current controller C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00995/2 SLPSM: Open-loop controlled standstill current C00076 Ti current controller C00830/28 Limitation of torque in generator mode C00996/1 SLPSM: Closed-loop controlled switching speed C00018...

  • Page 214: Types Of Control

    • It must be prevented that the actual speed value is braked into the non-observable area due to the torque limitation!  Note! To avoid instabilities during operation, the torque limit values are internally processed as absolute values. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 215: Basic Settings

    The Lenze settings of the current controller are predefined for a power-adapted motor. For an optimal drive behaviour of a synchronous motor, we recommend to adapt the controller settings. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 216 "Optimising the control mode" chapter. Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the chapter "Parameterisable additional functions". ( 258) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 217: Optimising The Control Mode

    The functions are described in chapter "Servo control (SC)": Setting the current setpoint filter (band-stop filter) ( 249) Adapting the max. acceleration change (jerk limitation) ( 250) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 218: Optimise Current Controller

    [ ] = Motor stator leakage inductance (C00085) = Motor stator resistance (C00084) = Equivalent time constant (= 500 μs) --------------- - Ω Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 219: Optimise Speed Controller

    = Rated motor speed = Total moment of inertia of the drive drive, total [5-14] Recommendation for the setting of the gain of the speed controller Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 220 • Following and speed errors can adopt very high values. • If the mechanics are sensitive, the corresponding monitoring functions are to be activated. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 221 3. Change gain Vp in C00070/3 and reset time Tn in C00071/3. 4. Repeat steps 1 ... 3 until the optimum ramp response is reached. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 222: Optimise Response To Setpoint Changes And Determine Mass Inertia

    • The optimisation could aim at the speed controller being completely relieved (see signal characteristics in Fig. [5-15]). 5. Save the parameter set (device command: C00002/11). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 223 First the speed controller, then this additive torque is connected which is hence not derived from the differential change in speed setpoint. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 224 • Recommendation: Deactivate the torque feedforward control for the speed setpoint in C00654/1 if the reference speed C0011 is 5 times higher than the rated motor speed C0087. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 225: Current-Dependent Stator Leakage Inductance Ppp(I)

    If required, the saturation characteristic of this motor must be set in C02853/1...17 and then activated in C02859. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 226 C02853/17 6.25 12.5 18.75 31.25 37.5 43.75 56.25 62.5 68.75 81.25 87.5 93.75 [5-16] Saturation characteristic: Inductance referring to the inductance for rated current Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 227: Pole Position Identification Without Motion

    10°. The identification takes 1 ... 15 ms depending on the motor. The function is preset in the Lenze setting so that no further settings need to be made in the majority of cases. In order to get the same behaviour as before, the function can be deactivated in C02874.
  • Page 228 This can prevent e.g. a reversing of the motor due to the accuracy of identification if applications require it. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 229: Field Weakening For Synchronous Motors

    [5-17] Voltage/speed characteristic with switched-on field weakening 800V ⋅ ------------------------------------- - nenn_mot ⋅ nenn_mot [5-18] Calculation of the maximally reachable speed with switched-on field weakening Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 230 (e.g. since no motor temperature detection is available and/or heating in the field weakening operation is to be limited), the value must be increased or reduced accordingly in C00938. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 231 DC-bus voltage of 800 V if field weakening is switched off. 4000 6000 [5-20] Example: Possible DC-bus voltage > 800 V if field weakening gets lost Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 232: Servo Control (Sc)

    • The implementation of torque-controlled operation with speed limitation • The limitation of the maximum torque in motor and generator mode for speed-controlled operation Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 233: Parameterisation Dialog/Signal Flow

    • When you click the >>More details button in the left-most position, a signal flow with more details/parameters is displayed, as shown in the following subchapter. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 234 Parameters Info Parameters Info Parameters Info C00830/22 Speed setpoint C00909/1 Max. pos. speed C00275 Setpoint feedforward control filtering C00833/67 MCTRL: bPosDerivativeOn C00909/2 Max. neg. speed C00273 Moment of inertia C00834/4 MCTRL: dnDeltaPos_p C00050 Speed setpoint C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00834/5 MCTRL: dnPosSetValue_p C00105...
  • Page 235 Parameters Info Parameters Info Parameters Info C00830/27 MCTRL: nTorqueSetValue_a C00270 SC: Freq. current setpoint filter C00075 Vp current controller C00830/29 Limitation of torque in motor mode C00271 SC: Current setpoint filter width C00076 Ti current controller C00830/28 Limitation of torque in generator mode C00272 SC: Current setpoint filter depth C00079/1...

  • Page 236: Types Of Control

    C02864: Bit 15 = 1: negative torque limitation (nTorqueLowLimit_a)  Note! To avoid instabilities during operation, the torque limit values are internally processed as absolute values. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 237 • Remedy: If the torque limits nTorqueMotLimit_a and nTorqueGenLimit_a are increased to 115 %, the set current limit values can also be reached for a motor temperature of 20°C and maximum load. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 238: Torque Control With Speed Limitation

    • Setting range: -199.99 ... 0 % • If keypad control is performed: Parameterisable via C00728/2. From version 18.00.00 onwards: C02864: Bit 15 = 1: negative torque limitation (nTorqueLowLimit_a) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 239: Basic Settings

    "Optimising the control mode". ( 241) Parameterisable additional functions are described correspondingly in the chapter "Parameterisable additional functions". ( 258) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 240: Parameterising The Encoder/Feedback System

    5. In the case of encoders with a very low resolution (number of increments < 120 increments): Change the encoder evaluation procedure in C00496 if necessary. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 241: Optimising The Control Mode

    "Manual jog" with appropriately adapted manual jog parameters if this basic function is supported by the selected technology application. ( 540) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 242: Optimise Current Controller

    [ ] = Motor stator leakage inductance (C00085) = Motor stator resistance (C00084) = Equivalent time constant (= 500 μs) --------------- - Ω Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 243: Optimise Speed Controller

    2. Increase Vp (C00070/2) until the drive is unstable (observe motor noise). 3. Reduce Vp (C00070/2) until the drive runs stable again. 4. Reduce Vp (C00070/2) to approx. half the value. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 244 For an optimal setting, we recommend to determine the mass inertia (optimal response to setpoint changes) first. Optimise response to setpoint changes and determine mass inertia ( 246) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 245 3. Change gain Vp in C00070/2 and reset time Tn in C00071/2. 4. Repeat steps 1 ... 3 until the optimum ramp response is reached. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 246: Optimise Response To Setpoint Changes And Determine Mass Inertia

    • The optimisation could aim at the speed controller being completely relieved (see signal characteristics in Fig. [5-22]). 5. Save the parameter set (device command: C00002/11). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 247 First the speed controller, then this additive torque is connected which is hence not derived from the differential change in speed setpoint. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 248 • Recommendation: Deactivate the torque feedforward control for the speed setpoint in C00654/1 if the reference speed C0011 is 5 times higher than the rated motor speed C0087. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 249: Setting The Current Setpoint Filter (Band-Stop Filter)

    Readjust the speed controller after setting the current setpoint filter. Optimise speed controller ( 243) The setting of the current setpoint filter reduces the available maximum drive torque. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 250: Adapting The Max. Acceleration Change (Jerk Limitation)

    • Here, jerk limitation is provided for in the travel profile generator. Setting this jerk limitation in the motor control would lead to following errors! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 251: Slip Calculation From Motor Equivalent Circuit Diagram Data

    • By selecting the motor in the »Engineer« motor catalogue or executing the motor parameter identification, bit 7 is set to "1" in C02864/1. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 252: Optimising The Behaviour In The Field Weakening Range

    Please note that this setting may cause higher torque peaks which can be reduced again by decreasing the field weakening controller gain ( C00577) or increasing the reset time (C00578). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 253 ( 137) • If a third party manufacturer's motor is used, motor parameter identification must be carried out previously. Automatic motor data identification ( 139) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 254 Increase Tn (C00578) according to the formula.  Note! Vp (C00577) can also be set to 0. In this case, Tn (C00578) should first be set to 2000 ms. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 255 P component of the field weakening controller and speed controller. In the Lenze setting, this function is activated. Depending on the application, this function can be deactivated via C00079/2.
  • Page 256 This function is deactivated in the Lenze setting because the robustness of the drive may decrease in the field weakening range. Possible consequences are slight speed variations. If required by the application, the function can be activated via C00079/3.

  • Page 257: Feedforward Control Of The Current Controller

    It is sufficient to select the motor from the »Engineer« motor catalog or enter the data of the motor equivalent circuit manually. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 258: Parameterisable Additional Functions

    C02864/1 MCTRL: Special settings 2 0x0000 Bit 4: Option "Motor ident: Switching frequency 8 kHz" (Off) (from version 16.00.00) Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 259 In this case, only the following settings in C00018 are permissible: Selection in C00018 7 8 kHz constant/drive-optimised 8 16 kHz constant/drive-optimised 23 16 kHz var./drive-opt./8 kHz min Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 260 An "Error" response is the result and the motor is coasting. Parameters Info Lenze setting C00144 Switching frequency reduction (temp.) 1: On Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 261 The inverter is designed so that operation at an ambient temperature of 45° C without derating is permissible at a switching frequency of 4 kHz. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 262: Operation With Increased Rated Power

    Setting of motor overload (I²xt) adapt to motor C00123 Device utilisat. threshold (Ixt) 120 % C00173 Mains voltage see hardware manual  Rated data Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 263 C00088 Rated motor current Automatic motor data identification ( 139) C00089 Rated motor frequency C00090 Rated motor voltage C00091 Motor cos ϕ Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 264: Flying Restart Function

    If the field frequency is not known, we recommend a fixed starting value of 10 Hz (or -10 Hz with systems rotating in negative direction). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 265 • At too high mass inertias and high speeds at the same time, the flying restart circuit may cause an overvoltage in the DC bus ("oU") if no brake resistor is connected. In this case, reduce the flying restart current. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 266 = Equivalent time constant (= 500 μs) --------------- - Ω [5-26] Formulae for the calculation of the gain and reset time of the current controller Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 267: Dc-Injection Braking

    The automatic DC-injection braking (Auto-DCB) improves the starting performance of the motor in case of V/f operation without speed feedback. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 268 DC-injection braking can be carried out in two ways with different types of activation: Manual DC-injection braking (DCB) ( 269) Automatic DC-injection braking (Auto-DCB) ( 269) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 269: Manual Dc-Injection Braking (Dcb)

    If the enabled drive is to start, the speed setpoint passed via the acceleration ramp must exceed the auto DCB threshold (C00019). Below this threshold, the motor will not be energised. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 270 • The operating threshold can serve to set a dead band in the setpoint. If DC-injection braking is not to be active then, C00106 must be set to a value of "0". Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 271  Controller output current C00106  Pulse inhibit  DC-injection braking is active [5-28] Example 2: Auto-GSB signal characteristic during V/f operation with speed feedback Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 272: Slip Compensation

    < 0) with V/f characteristic control results in "smoother" drive behaviour at heavy load impulses or applications requiring a significant speed drop under load. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 273: Oscillation Damping

    (band-stop filter) ( 249) Oscillation dampening, especially in the field weakening range, is also possible by activating the current controller feedforward control (C00079/1). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 274: Oscillation Damping Voltage Range

    • The filter time oscillation damping (C00235) should not be changed. 3. These can be indicators for smooth running: • Constant motor current characteristic • Reduction of the mechanical oscillations in the bearing seat Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 275: Oscillation Damping In The Field Weakening Range

    (increment 1). 3. These can be indicators for smooth running: • Constant motor current characteristic • Reduction of the mechanical oscillations in the bearing seat Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 276: Phase Sequence Reversal For Correcting Misconnected Uvw Motor Phases

    Cases of application for this function: • Phase sequence reversal in case of misconnected motor phases. • Setting of the correctly signed direction of rotation for inversely mounted motors. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 277: Encoder/Feedback System

    8400 protec hardware manual in the chapter "Technical data". • The hardware manual has been stored in electronic form on the data carrier supplied with the 8400 inverter. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 278 C00420/2 Encoder number of incr. Position controller C00425/2 Encoder sampling time 10 kHz C00254 FreqIn56 Kp position controller [5-29] Signal flow - encoder interface Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 279 • If an SSI encoder is connected to the synchronous serial interface (SSI): Use the SSI configuration... button to get to the settings for the SSI encoder evaluation. ( 287) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 280 5. In the case of encoders with a very low resolution (number of increments < 120 increments): Change the encoder evaluation procedure in C00496 if necessary. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 281: Parameterising Digital Inputs As Encoder Inputs

    Parameterising digital inputs as encoder inputs The function of the digital inputs DI1/DI2 and DI5/DI6 is defined via DI1/1...2. To be able to use the digital inputs as encoder inputs, select 2, 3, or 4 (Lenze recommendation: 2) in C00115/1 or C00115/2, depending on the input terminals used.

  • Page 282: Encoder Evaluation Method

    = 0, 1, or 2) for dynamic applications (e.g. operating mode: servo control). • For dynamic speed control or positioning processes, use an HTL encoder with 1024 increments. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 283: Generation Of The Actual Speed Value

    • In case of the motor control types with speed feedback, the dnMotorPosAct_p position signal is directly created from the speed feedback signal. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 284: Encoder With Htl Level At Di1/Di2

    Internal arithmetic operations automatically maintain the minimally required value of the scanning time in order to achieve maximum dynamics. Encoder Min. measurable speed in [rpm] resolution (Number of increments) ≥ 512 0.25 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 285 23.4 46.9 23.4 11.7 58.6 23.4 11.7 0.12 58.6 29.3 11.7 0.12 0.06 29.3 14.6 0.15 0.06 0.03 1024 14.6 0.15 0.07 0.03 0.01 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 286: Encoder With Htl Level At Di5/Di6

    DI5/DI6 is limited. Digital terminals ( 332) Encoder Max. measurable speed in [rpm] resolution (Number of increments) No restrictions 37500 18750 9375 4688 2344 1172 1024 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 287: Ssi Encoder Evaluation

    The technical data of the synchronous serial interfaces (SSI) can be found in the 8400 hardware manual. • The hardware manual has been stored in electronic form on the data carrier supplied with the 8400 inverter. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 288 SSI encoder: Start bit Multiturn C00426/4 SSI encoder: Bits Multiturn Partword 1: Singleturn C00426/3 SSI encoder: Start bit Singleturn C00426/2 SSI encoder: Bits SingleTurn Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 289 C00428 to convert from Gray to binary. • In the Lenze setting "0: Binary code", no conversion takes place, i.e. an SSI encoder with binary coding is expected. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 290 C00429/1 (SSI encoder: Advanced settings, bit 0: "Output raw data correctly"). In the Lenze setting, bit 0 is not active in order to provide for compatibility with the previous firmware versions. When C00429/1, bit 0 = "1" and...

  • Page 291: Important Notes For Using An Ssi Laser Position Encoder

    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 5.11.6.1 Important notes for using an SSI laser position encoder If you are using an SSI laser position encoder at X8 and, deviating from the Lenze setting, you have activated the position control for quick stop (C00104/1...

  • Page 292: Configuration Example 1: Optical Multi-Turn Rotary Encoder "G0M2H Z04" By Baumer

    ( 496) • One encoder revolution is displayed with 65536 increments. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 293: Configuration Example 2: Distance Sensor "Dme5000-111" By Sick

    C01204 in [units]. • The feed of the mechanics entered in C01204 is displayed with 65536 increments. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 294 C01111/1 65536 ⋅ with encoder feed constant ------------------------------------------------- - C01111/2 C01204 ⋅ C01111/1 65536 ⋅ Position Raw value ⋅ ------------------------------------------------- - C01111/2 C01204 ⋅ Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 295: Evaluation Of External Absolute Value Encoders

    Finally, only • a once-only homing has to be executed , mode 100: SetRef) or ( 521) Homing • "mains switching" can be carried out. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 296: Position Control/Additive Speed Specification

    MCTRL: bPosDerivativeOn TRUE = Setpoint for the speed controller is created from the position setpoint C00830/21 MCTRL: nPosCtrlOutLimit_a Limitation of the position controller output Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 297: Braking Operation/Brake Energy Management

    This prevents overvoltage deactivation in the case of short deceleration times.Selecting the response to an increase of the DC-bus voltage ( 301) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 298 • For a switch-off at pulse inhibit, set bit 7 to "1" in C02865/1. • For a switch-off in the "Fault" device status, set bit 2 to "1" in C02864/1. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 299 3. Go to the Overview dialog level and click the "basic functions" button. 4. Go to the Overview  basic functions dialog box and click the Brake energy management button. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 300: Setting The Voltage Source For Braking Operation

    • This brake chopper threshold can be reduced by 0 ... 150 V by means of C00174.  Stop! The brake chopper threshold resulting from C00173 C00174 must not exceed the stabilised DC-bus voltage! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 301: Selecting The Response To An Increase Of The Dc-Bus Voltage

    • The "inverter motor brake" function must not be used with vertical conveyors (hoists) or with active loads! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 302 A combination of all three braking procedures is also possible, e.g. for emergency braking if the brake resistor fails (C00175 = "4: Brake resistor + FI_MotBrk + RfgStop"). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 303: Inverter Motor Brake

    • For applications with low mass inertias and a short braking time (< 1 s). • For all applications where braking should be as quick as possible. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 304 [5-32] Formula for calculating the additive speed setpoint for an asynchronous motor • In case of a synchronous motor, the additive speed setpoint (C00987) should be 5 … 20 % of the rated machine speed. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 305 • Adapt the deceleration ramp so that the deceleration time is slightly below (10 ... 30 %) the deceleration time that can be realised with the inverter motor brake. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 306: Avoiding Thermal Overload Of The Brake Resistor

    DC-bus system via fieldbus or digital output. All the other inverters of the DC-bus system are "brake chopper slaves". Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 307 (or 725 V ) and a mains voltage of 480 V or 500 V set in C00173, the plausibility monitoring is not effective anymore. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 308 • We recommend this setting when this function is used in order to achieve a higher discharge of the DC bus - especially in case of high device power. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 309: Monitoring

    ( 111) Diagnostics & error management ( 589) Basics on error handling in the inverter ( 589) Error messages of the operating system ( 617) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 310: Device Overload Monitoring (Ixt)

    For the installation according to UL or UR, the safety instructions provided in the hardware manual must be observed! Among other things, the activation of the motor overload monitoring (I2xt) is required here. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 311 : Rated motor current (see nameplate of motor) C00054: Apparent motor current C00120: Motor overload setting [5-34] Tripping characteristic of the I xt monitoring Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 312: Motor Overcurrent Monitoring

    C00022 C00023 will automatically be adapted to the selected motor. Related topics: Maximum current monitoring ( 319) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 313: Motor Temperature Monitoring (Ptc)

    Connect a fixed resistor to the PTC input: • R > 4 kΩ : Fault message must be activated. • R < 1 kΩ : Fault message must not be activated. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 314: Brake Resistor Monitoring (I2Xt)

    C00572, there is the switching threshold of the brake transistor which results from the mains voltage (C00173) and the reduced brake chopper threshold (C00174). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 315 • A utilisation of 100 % corresponds to the continuous power of the brake resistor depending on the maximally permissible temperature limit. Related topics: Braking operation/brake energy management ( 297) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 316: Motor Phase Failure Monitoring

    • an error is pending due to a DC-bus overvoltage ("oU:DC-bus overvoltage"), • motor parameter identification is carried out, • DC-injection braking is active. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 317: Motor Phase Error Monitoring Before Operation

    In this case, the motor phase error monitoring must be switched off before operation (C2866/2 = "0: No"). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 318 • The MCTRL_Status3 status word can be integrated in the application via configuration parameters (e.g. C00620) (MCTRL_Status3 = selection 34906 in Selection list - analog signals). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 319: Mains Phase Failure Monitoring

    If the activated monitoring is tripped: • The "oC10: Maximum current reached" error message is entered in the logbook. Related topics: Motor overcurrent monitoring ( 312) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 320: Current Monitoring For Overload

    FALSE – state. When bCurrentMonitoringOverload = FALSE, the delay time in the resolution is set to the value 0 s again. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 321: Maximum Torque Monitoring

    A setting of sensible limit values serves to use the bFail status signal to determine whether the ID or the position of the SSI bar code scanner has been detected. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 322: Encoder Open-Circuit Monitoring

    LS_DeviceMonitor SB is set to TRUE. • A setting of C00586 = "0: No Reaction" deactivates the monitoring. Related topics: Encoder/feedback system ( 277) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 323: Internal Interfaces | System Block "Ls_Motorinterface

    • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % Vp (C00070) C00830/25 | INT bSpeedInterpolatorOn Speed setpoint interpolation C00833/28 | BOOL FALSE Deactivate interpolation TRUE Activate interpolation Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 324 Values selected too high may cause the motor to heat up due to the resulting current! bPosCtrlOn Position/angle control C00833/27 | BOOL FALSE Deactivate position/angle control. TRUE Activate position/angle control. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 325 FALSE Speed control with torque limitation TRUE Torque control with speed limitation nTorqueSetValue_a Torque setpoint / additive torque • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % M (C00057) C00830/27 | INT Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 326 • Servo control (SC) or vector control (SLVC): 16384 ≡ 100 % M (C00057) nEffSpeedSetValue_a Effective speed setpoint • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 327 • To enable the ramp function generator to follow automatically when the controller is inhibited, for jerk-free setpoint connection. TRUE Set the ramp function generator to a setpoint of nHlgSetValue_a Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 328 Status signal of the internal brake chopper control Control of multiple internal brake choppers in the DC-bus system ( 306) BOOL (from version 12.00.00) TRUE Internal brake chopper is switched-on. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 329: Internal Status Signals | System Block "Ls_Devicemonitor

    TRUE Device utilisation (Ixt) ≥ device utilisation threshold (C00123) • Lenze setting: C00123 = 150 % nMctrlIxtRate_a Current device utilisation (Ixt) • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 330 • This output is set independent of the set error response of the monitoring BOOL function. TRUE The I xt utilisation has reached the switch-off threshold set in C00572. • Lenze setting: C00572 = 100 %. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 331: I/O Terminals

    How you can alter the preconfigured assignment of the input and output terminals is described in the chapter entitled "User-defined terminal assignment". ( 368) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 332: Digital Terminals

    • In case of a critical exception in the application (e.g. reset), the digital outputs are set to FALSE considering the terminal polarity parameterised in C00118. Parameterisation dialog in the »Engineer«: Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 333 DOx: Terminal level Greyed out = display parameter Related topics: Configuring exception handling of the output terminals ( 367) User-defined terminal assignment ( 368) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 334: Change Function Assignment

    ( 335) Using DI1(5) and DI2(6) as frequency inputs ( 336) Using DI1(5) as counting input ( 341) Reconfiguring DI3(4) to output DO1(2) ( 345) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 335: Using Di1(5) And Di2(6) As Digital Inputs

    ( 336) Using DI1(5) as counting input ( 341) Reconfiguring DI3(4) to output DO1(2) ( 345) Internal interfaces | System block "LS_DigitalInput" ( 347) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 336: Using Di1(5) And Di2(6) As Frequency Inputs

    Detailed information on this topic is provided in chapter "Output of the encoder position of the DI1/DI2 frequency input". ( 350) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 337 DI2 or DI6 remains configured as "normal" digital input. Function assignment 2: DI1(5)&DI2(6)=FreqIn (2-track) This setting in C00115 can be used to connect a two-track encoder to the DI1/DI2 or DI5/DI6 terminals. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 338 DI5/DI6. For this purpose, the rotation speed is evaluated via terminal DI1(5) and the direction of rotation of the encoder (LOW level ≡ CW direction of rotation) is evaluated via the DI(6) terminal. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 339 FreqIn56: Offset 0.00 % C02843/2 FreqIn56: Gain 100.00 % C00443/1 DIx: Terminal level C00445/2 FreqIn56_nOut_v - Incr/ms C00446/2 FreqIn56_nOut_a Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 340 Using DI1(5) and DI2(6) as digital inputs ( 335) Using DI1(5) as counting input ( 341) Internal interfaces | System block "LS_DigitalInput" ( 347) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 341: Using Di1(5) As Counting Input

    This setting in C00115 configures the input terminal DI1 or DI5 as counting input. The input terminal DI2 or DI6 remains configured as "normal" digital input.. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 342 CountIn5: Starting value 0 incr C02840/4 CountIn5: Comparison value 65535 incr C02841/2 CountIn5: Counter content - incr C00443/1 DIx: Terminal level Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 343 Current count value wCountIn5_LW • Output as High and Low word (without sign) • Possible counting range: 0 ... 2 C02841/2 | WORD Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 344 Using DI1(5) and DI2(6) as digital inputs ( 335) Using DI1(5) and DI2(6) as frequency inputs ( 336) Internal interfaces | System block "LS_DigitalInput" ( 347) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 345: Reconfiguring Di3(4) To Output Do1(2)

    Parameterisation dialog in the »Engineer«: After the reconfiguration, the outputs DO1/DO2 are displayed with the corresponding parameters on the Terminal assignment tab instead of the inputs DI3/DI4: Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 346 Related topics: Internal interfaces | System block "LS_DigitalOutput" ( 354) Configuring exception handling of the output terminals ( 367) User-defined terminal assignment ( 368) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 347: Internal Interfaces | System Block "Ls_Digitalinput

    • The inputs DI3/DI4 are always designed as "normal" digital inputs or as digital outputs through reconfiguration in C00116. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 348 Status signal "Overflow occurred/distance processed" • Status signal can be reset via bPosIn12_Load. BOOL (from version 06.00.00) TRUE Overflow has occurred or distance is processed. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 349 Using DI1(5) and DI2(6) as frequency inputs nFreqIn56_a Output frequency as scaled analog signal in [%] C00446/2 | INT nFreqIn56_v Output frequency as speed signal in [inc/ms] C00445/2 | INT Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 350: Output Of The Encoder Position Of The Di1/Di2 Frequency Input

    • Overflow is possible (display via bPosIn12_State) bPosIn12_State Status signal "Overflow occurred/distance processed" • Status signal can be reset via bPosIn12_Load. BOOL TRUE Overflow has occurred or distance is processed. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 351 • A positive nFreqIn12_v signal is incremented (the counter content is increased with every cycle). • A negative nFreqIn12_v signal is decremented (the counter content is reduced with every cycle). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 352 • If the negative counter content is lower than the comparison value set in C02845, the comparison value will be added to the counter content, and bPosIn12_State will be set to TRUE for one task cycle. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 353 60 s • Calculation of the output value: 1000 rev. 65535 incr. dnPosIn12_p ----------------------- 10 s ⋅ ⋅ ---------------------------- 10922666 incr. 60 s Rev. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 354: Internal Interfaces | System Block "Ls_Digitaloutput

    Editor displays the digital outputs DO1 and DO2. Input Information/possible settings DIS code | data type bOut1 Digital output DO1 C00444/1 | BOOL bOut2 Digital output DO2 C00444/2 | BOOL Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 355: Analog Terminals

    C00029/1 AIN1: Input current - mA C00033/1 AIN1: Output value (to application) Greyed out = display parameter Related topics: User-defined terminal assignment ( 368) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 356: Parameterising Analog Input

    Using current input A1I In the Lenze setting, voltage signals in the 0 ... +10 V range are evaluated via the analog input A1U. If current signals are to be detected via the input A1I instead, the selection "1: 0...20 mA" or "2: 4...20mA"...

  • Page 357: Signal Adaptation By Means Of Characteristic

     AIN1: (-xmax) 199.99 % In the »Engineer«, there is a parameterising dialog for entering the characteristic. This dialog also displays the set characteristic graphically. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 358 Analog input dialog. 3. Click on the Settings button in order to open the Analog input - Characteristic dialog box: Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 359: Internal Interfaces | System Block "Ls_Analoginput

    • Only when analog input 1 is used as current input. BOOL • Application: Cable-breakage monitoring of the 4 ...20 mA circuit. TRUE |I | < 4 mA AIN1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 360: Touch Probe Detection

    Applications Digital input DI4 Rising edge, falling edge, rising and Homing falling edge (parameterisable) Residual path positioning Digital input DI6 Position measurement Freely interconnectable Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 361 Open the parameterisation dialog for the selected TP signal source. Parameter setting ( 362) Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C02810/4...6 TPDigIn4 ... TPDigIn6: Edge selection 0: Off Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 362: Parameter Setting

    TP signal source in the parameterisation dialogs for Profile entry and the basic "Homing" function via the Set up touch probe... button: Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 363 SB LS_TouchProbe. For this purpose, the offset value is converted internally from [units] to [increments]. Position TP position C02817/x LS_TouchProbe.dnTPDigInX_Position_p Offset LS_MotorInterface.dnMotorPosAct_p C02812/x TP signal Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 364 Make sure that the position source of the respective TP signal in C02815/x is set to "0: position encoder actual value". Otherwise, no TP correction will take place. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 365: Internal Interfaces | System Block "Ls_Touchprobe

    • The signal is only pending for one task cycle (1 ms). BOOL dnTPDigIn4...6Position_p DI4 ... DI6: Position measured by touch probe in [units] DINT Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 366: Application Example: "Position Measurement

    LS_TouchProbe SB are masked out.  Delta position between two touch probes [6-5] Wiring for position measurement Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 367: Configuring Exception Handling Of The Output Terminals

    Bit 5  BrakeRelease_ON Bit 6  Reserved ..Bit 15  Reserved Related topics: Configuring exception handling of the CAN PDOs ( 702) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 368: User-Defined Terminal Assignment

    In C00007, control mode "0: Interconnection changed" will be shown.  Tip! First of all, select a Lenze configuration useful for the purpose at hand by going to C00005 and selecting a technology application that matches your drive task and then going to C00007 and selecting an appropriate control mode.

  • Page 369: Source-Destination Principle

    • Every input of the application block can only be logically linked to one input signal. • An output of the application block can be logically linked to several device output terminals. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 370: Changing The Terminal Assignment With The Keypad

    Configuration parameters ( 401) C00700/x Analog connection list C00701/x Digital connection list TA "Switch-off positioning": Configuration parameters ( 457) C00760/x Analog connection list C00761/x Digital connection list Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 371 The example shows that, for each input of the application block, the associated configuration parameter (C00700/x or C00701/x) is only allowed to contain one source that you enter. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 372: Changing The Terminal Assignment With The "Engineer

    3. Remove checkmark for the connection LA_NCtrl: bJogSpeed2 in order to cancel the existing logical link. 4. Set checkmark for connection LA_NCtrl: bJogRamp1 in order to logically link this application input to digital input DI2. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 373 5. In the bJogRamp1 list field, set the selection "16001: DigIn_bIn2". 6. Click on the Back button in order to close the dialog box again. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 374 You can find detailed information on how to use the FB editor of the »Engineer« in the main chapter entitled "Working with the FB Editor". ( 1170) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 375: Technology Applications

    Commissioning of the "Actuating drive speed" technology application ( 57) Commissioning of the "Table positioning" technology application ( 65) Commissioning of the "Switch-off positioning" technology application ( 80) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 376: Selection Of The Technology Application And The Control Mode

    Detailed information on the individual configuration of the input/output terminals can be found in the description of the I/O terminals in the subchapter"User-defined terminal assignment". ( 368) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 377: Ta "Actuating Drive Speed

    • Interface to the safety module (optional) • Integration of encoder feedback Related topics: Commissioning of the "Actuating drive speed" technology application ( 57) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 378: Basic Signal Flow

     Terminal assignment & display of digital control signals  Integrated disposable "GeneralPurpose" functions: Analog switch, arithmetic, multiplication/division, binary delay element, binary logic, analog comparison, D-flipflop Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 379 In the case of a grinding machine, the additional speed setpoint can, for instance, be used to control a constant circumferential speed while the grinding disk diameter is reduced. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 380: Internal Interfaces | Application Block "La_Nctrl

    • The quick stop is deactivated if no other source for the quick stop is active. • C00159 displays a bit code of active sources/causes for the quick stop. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 381 Additional offset for the electrical angle of rotation • If a torque is connected, e.g. dynamic acceleration processes can be generated. • Scaling: ±32767 ≡ ±180 ° angle of rotation Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 382 • Upstream to the ramp function generator, a blocking speed masking function and a setpoint MinMax limitation are effective. • For a detailed functional description see the L_NSet Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 383 • In the Lenze setting, the speed setpoint is maintained. bMPotDown Decreasing the speed setpoint BOOL TRUE Approach the lower speed limit value set In C00801 with the deceleration time set in C00803. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 384 • In semi-automatic operation, the brake is released including feedforward control. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 385 The signals can be transferred from the I/O level to the application level via these inputs. bFreeIn1 ... bFreeIn8 Free inputs for digital signals BOOL wFreeIn1 ... wFreeIn4 Free inputs for 16-bit signals WORD Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 386 • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % M (C00057) nDCVoltage_a Actual DC-bus voltage • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 1000 V Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 387 The signals from the application level can be transferred to the I/O level via these outputs. bFreeOut1 ... bFreeOut8 Free outputs for digital signals BOOL wFreeOut1 ... wFreeOut4 Free outputs for 16-bit signals WORD Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 388: Terminal Assignment Of The Control Modes

    7.2.3 Terminal assignment of the control modes The following comparison provides information about which inputs/outputs of the application block LA_NCtrl are interconnected to the digital and analog input/output terminals of the inverter in the different control modes. Control mode (C00007) Terminals 0 Terminals 2 Terminals 11...

  • Page 389: Terminals 11

    C00116. X41/DI2 LA_NCtrl.bJogSpeed2 X42/DI3 LA_NCtrl.bSetDCBrake X42/DO1 X42/DI4 LA_NCtrl.bSetSpeedCcw X42/DO2 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady X43/DI5 X50/A1U LA_NCtrl.nMainSetValue_a 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X43/DI6 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 390 C00116. X41/DI2 LA_NCtrl.bJogSpeed2 X42/DI3 LA_NCtrl.bSetQuickstop X42/DO1 X42/DI4 LA_NCtrl.bSetSpeedCcw X42/DO2 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady X43/DI5 X50/A1U LA_NCtrl.nMainSetValue_a 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X43/DI6 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 391 C00116. X41/DI2 LA_NCtrl.bSetDCBrake X42/DI3 LA_NCtrl.bMPotUp X42/DO1 X42/DI4 LA_NCtrl.bMPotDown X42/DO2 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady X43/DI5 X50/A1U LA_NCtrl.nMainSetValue_a 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X43/DI6 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 392: Terminal 16

    C00116. X41/DI2 LA_NCtrl.bJogSpeed2 X42/DI3 LA_NCtrl. bRLQCw X42/DO1 X42/DI4 LA_NCtrl. bRLQCcw X42/DO2 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady X43/DI5 X50/A1U LA_NCtrl.nMainSetValue_a 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X43/DI6 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 393: Keypad

    Assignment X41/DI1 DO1/DO2 is only available after respective change of the function assignment in C00116. X41/DI2 X42/DI3 X42/DO1 X42/DI4 X42/DO2 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady X43/DI5 X50/A1U X43/DI6 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 394 Assignment X41/DI1 DO1/DO2 is only available after respective change of the function assignment in C00116. X41/DI2 X42/DI3 X42/DO1 X42/DI4 X42/DO2 LA_NCtrl.bDriveReady X43/DI5 X50/A1U X43/DI6 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 395: Can

    A1U has an additive effect. • The "manual jog" function via digital terminals is being prepared! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 396: Mci

    A1U has an additive effect. • The "manual jog" function via digital terminals is being prepared! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 397: Process Data Assignment For Fieldbus Communication

    1 ≡ Activate DC-injection braking Manual DC-injection braking (DCB) ( 269) Bit 12 JogSpeed1 Activation of fixed speed 1 ... 3 Bit 13 JogSpeed2 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 398 • E.g. if an overvoltage has occurred. Bit 14 FreeStatusBit14 Free status bit 14 (not assigned, freely assignable) Bit 15 FreeStatusBit15 Free status bit 15 (not assigned, freely assignable) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 399: Setting Parameters (Short Overview)

    0.00 % C00635 L_NSet_1: nMaxLimit 199.99 % C00636 L_NSet_1: nMinLimit -199.99 % C00670 L_OffsetGainP_1: Gain 1.0000 C00671 L_OffsetGainP_2: Gain 1.0000 C00672 L_OffsetGainP_3: Gain 1.0000 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 400 0: Retain value C00805 L_MPot_1: Init fct. 0: Load last value C00806 Use of motor potentiometer 0: No Related topics: "GeneralPurpose" functions ( 460) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 401: Configuration Parameters

    1002 /110 bSpeedCcw bCwCcw 1004 bSpeedActCompare bNactCompare 1005 [7-2] Pre-assignment of the "Actuating drive speed" application in the "Terminals 0" control mode Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 402 C00411/2 C00412 - Bit 1 bGPSignalOut2 1011 C00411/3 C00412 - Bit 2 bGPSignalOut3 1012 C00411/4 C00412 - Bit 3 bGPSignalOut4 1013 [7-3] "GeneralPurpose" functions Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 403 C700/27 1024 wFreeIn3 wFreeOut3 C700/28 1025 wFreeIn4 wFreeOut4 C700/29 1026 [7-5] Free inputs/outputs Related topics: User-defined terminal assignment ( 368) "GeneralPurpose" functions ( 460) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 404: Ta "Table Positioning

    Analog switch, arithmetic, multiplication/division, binary delay element, binary logic, analog comparison, D-FlipFlop, counter Related topics: Commissioning of the "Table positioning" technology application ( 65) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 405: Basic Signal Flow

     Speed setpoint input limitation Holding brake control               Basic function "Homing" MCKInterface  Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 406: Possibilities For The Position Selection

    • The chosen profile is started via the process input bPosExecute of the FB L_MckCtrlInterface the control bit "PosExecute" in the MCK control word. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 407  Note! How to store changed profile parameters safely against mains failure in the memory module: Set C00002/11 = "1: On / Start". Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 408: Internal Interfaces | Application Block "La_Tabpos

    • The quick stop is deactivated if no other source for the quick stop is active. • C00159 displays a bit code of active sources/causes for the quick stop. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 409 • For a detailed functional description see the L_NSet bJogSpeed1 Inputs for overriding fixed setpoints (JOG setpoints) for the main setpoint bJogSpeed2 • Selection inputs are binary coded. BOOL Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 410 LP_MciIn or WORD LP_CanIn fieldbus interface. • See the "MCK control word" chapter for a detailed description of the individual control bits. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 411 • Values > 16384 are ignored. • If the override value is 0 %, the drive is brought to a standstill. bEnableAccOverride Acceleration override BOOL TRUE Activate acceleration override Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 412 Positioning: Cancel travelling BOOL TRUE Stop positioning From version 12.00.00, more travel requests will be inhibited ("PosExecute" will be blocked). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 413 • The on-delay can be set in C00720/1. BOOL • The off-delay can be set in C00720/2. • The time-delayed input signal is output at output bGPDigitalDelayOut. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 414 WORD wStateDetermFailNoHigh Display of the status determining error (HIGH word) WORD bDriveFail TRUE Inverter in error status. • "Fault" device status is active. BOOL Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 415 Active setpoint-generating state of the MCK. • Bit B0 ... B3 contain the information of the MCK status word. WORD • Bits B4 ... B15 are fixed at "0". Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 416 Output of the target position in [units] wPosOutUnitsHW • wPosOutUnitsLW = Low-Word, wPosOutUnitsHW = High-Word • The mode for calculating the position is selected in C01296/2. WORD Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 417 ... bFreeOut8 Free outputs for digital signals BOOL wFreeOut1 ... wFreeOut4 Free outputs for 16-bit signals WORD dnFreeOut1_p Free outputs for 32-bit signals dnFreeOut2_p WORD Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 418: Terminal Assignment Of The Control Modes

    7.3.3 Terminal assignment of the control modes The following comparison provides information about which inputs/outputs of the application block LA_TabPos are interconnected to the digital and analog input/output terminals of the inverter in the different control modes. Control mode (C00007) Terminals 0 Terminals 2 Terminals 11...

  • Page 419: Terminals 11

    When the profile is defined, the operating mode in the Lenze setting is changed simultaneously: bPosProfileNo_2 bPosProfileNo_1 Selected profile Activation of operating mode (DI5) FALSE TRUE (fix) Homing TRUE TRUE (fix) Positioning Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 420: Terminal 16

    Selected profile Activation of operating mode (DI4) (DI5) FALSE FALSE Speed follower FALSE TRUE Homing TRUE FALSE Manual jog TRUE TRUE Positioning Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 421 Selected profile Activation of operating mode (DI4) (DI5) FALSE FALSE Speed follower FALSE TRUE Homing TRUE FALSE Manual jog TRUE TRUE Positioning Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 422 When the profile is defined, the operating mode in the Lenze setting is changed simultaneously: bPosProfileNo_2 bPosProfileNo_1 Selected profile Activation of operating mode (DI5) FALSE TRUE (fix) Homing TRUE TRUE (fix) Positioning Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 423: Keypad

    X41/DI1 DO1/DO2 is only available after respective change of the function assignment in C00116. X41/DI2 X42/DI3 X42/DO1 LA_TabPos.bDriveReady X42/DI4 X42/DO2 LA_TabPos.bInTarget X43/DI5 X50/A1U X43/DI6 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 424 X41/DI1 DO1/DO2 is only available after respective change of the function assignment in C00116. X41/DI2 X42/DI3 X42/DO1 LA_TabPos.bDriveReady X42/DI4 X42/DO2 LA_TabPos.bInTarget X43/DI5 X50/A1U X43/DI6 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 425: Can

    LA_TabPos.bInTarget X43/DI5 LA_TabPos.bHomeMark X50/A1U LA_TabPos.nMainSetValue_a 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X43/DI6 LA_TabPos.bSetQuickstop Process data assignment for fieldbus communication ( 427)  Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 426: Mci

    X42/DO2 LA_TabPos.bInTarget X43/DI5 LA_TabPos.bHomeMark X50/A1U LA_TabPos.nMainSetValue_a 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X43/DI6 LA_TabPos.bSetQuickstop Process data assignment for fieldbus communication ( 427) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 427: Process Data Assignment For Fieldbus Communication

    Bit 13 ManJogPos Bit 14 - Free control bit 14 (not assigned, freely assignable) Bit 15 - Free control bit 15 (not assigned, freely assignable) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 428 Signal from the digital input DI3 Bit 14 QSPIsActive 1 ≡ Quick stop is active Bit 15 - Free status bit 15 (not assigned, freely assignable) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 429: Setting Parameters (Short Overview)

    MCK operating mode at profile no. 2 3: ManualJog C01298/4 MCK operating mode at profile no. 3...15 4: Positioning C01299 MCKI: Status MCKInterface Related topics: "GeneralPurpose" functions ( 460) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 430: Configuration Parameters

    C_wDriveCtrl 20005 bCInhActive bCInhIsActive 1102 bSpeedCcw bCwCcw 1104 bSpeedActCompare bNactCompare 1105 [7-7] Pre-assignment of the "Table positioning" application in the "Terminals 0" control mode Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 431 C00411/2 C00412 - Bit 1 bGPSignalOut2 1123 C00411/3 C00412 - Bit 2 bGPSignalOut3 1124 C00411/4 C00412 - Bit 3 bGPSignalOut4 1125 [7-8] "GeneralPurpose" functions Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 432 C710/24 1123 wFreeIn3 wFreeOut3 C710/25 1124 wFreeIn4 wFreeOut4 C710/26 1125 [7-10] Free inputs/outputs Related topics: User-defined terminal assignment ( 368) "GeneralPurpose" functions ( 460) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 433: Ta "Switch-Off Positioning

    When the limit switch is reached, the drive is brought to a standstill led by the deceleration ramp or the QSP ramp. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 434 • A table positioning or sequential positioning control is required for highly dynamic applications and jerk-free traversing profiles which is available with the "HighLine" device version. Related topics: Commissioning of the "Switch-off positioning" technology application ( 80) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 435: Basic Signal Flow

     Selection of edge/level for tripping the ramp down and stop functions (L_JogCtrlExtension_1) Holding brake control   Integrated disposable "GeneralPurpose" functions: Analog switch, arithmetic, multiplication/division, binary delay element, binary logic, analog comparison, D-flipflop Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 436: Internal Interfaces | Application Block "La_Switchpos

    • The quick stop is deactivated if no other source for the quick stop is active. • C00159 displays a bit code of active sources/causes for the quick stop. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 437 Additional offset for the electrical angle of rotation • If a torque is connected, e.g. dynamic acceleration processes can be generated. • Scaling: ±32767 ≡ ±180 ° angle of rotation Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 438 • The additional speed setpoint can be shown via ramp times of a second ramp function generator. • For a detailed functional description see the L_NSet Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 439 • In semi-automatic operation, the brake is released including feedforward control. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 440 Display of the status determining error (LOW word) WORD wStateDetermFailNoHigh Display of the status determining error (HIGH word) WORD Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 441 • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % M (C00057) nDCVoltage_a Actual DC-bus voltage • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 1000 V nMotorVoltage_a Current motor voltage/inverter output voltage • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 1000 V Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 442 ... bFreeOut8 Free outputs for digital signals BOOL wFreeOut1 ... wFreeOut4 Free outputs for 16-bit signals WORD dnFreeOut1_p Free outputs for 32-bit signals dnFreeOut2_p WORD Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 443: Truth Table For Activating The Pre-Switch Off

    • If the stop function is activated via the bJogCtrlStop3 are evaluated. selected bJogCtrlStop input, the setpoint generator is deactivated. [7-1] Truth table for activating the pre-switch off Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 444: Terminal Assignment Of The Control Modes

    7.4.3 Terminal assignment of the control modes The following comparison provides information about which inputs/outputs of the application block LA_SwitchPos are interconnected to the digital and analog input/output terminals of the inverter in the different control modes. Control mode (C00007) Terminals 0 Terminals 2 Terminals 11...

  • Page 445: Terminals 11

    C00116. X41/DI2 LA_SwitchPos.bJogCtrlJog2 X42/DI3 LA_SwitchPos.bFailReset X42/DO1 X42/DI4 LA_SwitchPos.bSetSpeedCcw X42/DO2 LA_SwitchPos.bDriveReady X43/DI5 X50/A1U LA_SwitchPos.nMainSetValue_a 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X43/DI6 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 446 LA_SwitchPos: bRLQCw X42/DO1 LA_SwitchPos: bJogCtrlInputSel1 X42/DI4 LA_SwitchPos: bRLQCcw X42/DO2 LA_SwitchPos.bDriveReady LA_SwitchPos: bJogCtrlInputSel2 X43/DI5 X50/A1U LA_SwitchPos.nMainSetValue_a 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X43/DI6 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 447 LA_SwitchPos: bJogCtrlInputSel1 X42/DI4 LA_SwitchPos: bRLQCcw X42/DO2 LA_SwitchPos.bDriveReady LA_SwitchPos: bJogCtrlInputSel2 X43/DI5 LA_SwitchPos: bJogCtrlStop2 X50/A1U LA_SwitchPos.nMainSetValue_a 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X43/DI6 LA_SwitchPos: bJogCtrlSlowDown2 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 448: Terminal 16

    X41/DI2 LA_SwitchPos: bJogCtrlJog2 X42/DI3 LA_SwitchPos: bRLQCw X42/DO1 X42/DI4 LA_SwitchPos: bRLQCcw X42/DO2 LA_SwitchPos.bDriveReady X43/DI5 X50/A1U LA_SwitchPos.nMainSetValue_a 10 V ≡ 100 % reference speed (C00011) X43/DI6 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 449: Keypad

    Connection Assignment X41/DI1 DO1/DO2 is only available after respective change of the function assignment in C00116. X41/DI2 X42/DI3 X42/DO1 X42/DI4 X42/DO2 X43/DI5 X50/A1U X43/DI6 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 450 Connection Assignment X41/DI1 DO1/DO2 is only available after respective change of the function assignment in C00116. X41/DI2 X42/DI3 X42/DO1 X42/DI4 X42/DO2 X43/DI5 X50/A1U X43/DI6 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 451: Can

    C00190 to "1: NOut = NSet + NAdd" so that the additional speed setpoint selected via the analog input A1U has an additive effect. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 452: Mci

    C00190 to "1: NOut = NSet + NAdd" so that the additional speed setpoint selected via the analog input A1U has an additive effect. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 453: Process Data Assignment For Fieldbus Communication

    Ramping down of the setpoint generator in the downstream L_NSet FB according to the Truth table for activating the pre-switch off Bit 9 reserved_1 Reserved (currently not assigned) Bit 10 reserved_2 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 454 Device state machine and device states (see table [4-1]) Bit 9 StatusCodeBit1 Bit 10 StatusCodeBit2 Bit 11 StatusCodeBit3 Bit 12 Warning 1 ≡ a warning is indicated Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 455: Setting Parameters (Short Overview)

    L_NSet_1: Blocking speed 3 min 0.00 % C00635 L_NSet_1: nMaxLimit 199.99 % C00636 L_NSet_1: nMinLimit -199.99 % C00670 L_OffsetGainP_1: Gain 1.0000 C00671 L_OffsetGainP_2: Gain 1.0000 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 456 MCK: Pos. min. speed 0.00 % C02611/3 MCK: Neg. min. speed 0.00 % C02611/4 MCK: Neg. max. speed 199.99 % Related topics: "GeneralPurpose" functions ( 460) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 457: Configuration Parameters

    1204 bImpIsActive bImpIsActive 1205 bSpeedCcw bCwCcw 1207 bSpeedActCompare bNactCompare 1208 [7-12] Pre-assignment of the "Switch-off positioning" application in the "Terminals 0" control mode Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 458 C00411/2 C00412 - Bit 1 bGPSignalOut2 1220 C00411/3 C00412 - Bit 2 bGPSignalOut3 1221 C00411/4 C00412 - Bit 3 bGPSignalOut4 1222 [7-13] "GeneralPurpose" functions Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 459 C760/25 1224 dnFreeIn1_p dnFreeOut1_p 1205 dnFreeIn2_p dnFreeOut2_p 1206 [7-15] Free inputs/outputs Related topics: User-defined terminal assignment ( 368) "GeneralPurpose" functions ( 460) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 460: Generalpurpose" Functions

    This function switches between two analog input signals. The switch-over is controlled by a boolean input signal. C00830/14 nGPAnalogSwitchIn1_a nGPAnalogSwitchOut_a C00830/15 nGPAnalogSwitchIn2_a C00833/13 bGPAnalogSwitchSet [7-16] GeneralPurpose function "Analog switch" • For a detailed functional description see FB L_AnalogSwitch. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 461: Arithmetic

    [7-18] GeneralPurpose function "Multiplication/division" Parameters Info Lenze setting Value Unit C00699/1 L_MulDiv_1: Numerator C00699/2 L_MulDiv_1: Denominator 10000 • For a detailed functional description see FB L_MulDiv. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 462: Binary Delay Element

    L_DigitalLogic_1: Function 0: bOut = 0 C00821/1 bIn1=0/bIn2=0/bIn3=0 0: FALSE C00821/... C00821/8 bIn1=1/bIn2=1/bIn3=1 0: FALSE • For a detailed functional description see FB L_DigitalLogic. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 463: Analog Comparison

    Value Unit C00411/1...4 L_SignalMonitor_b: Signal 1 ... 4 0: Not connected C00412 L_SignalMonitor_b: Inversion Bit coded • For a detailed functional description see FB L_SignalMonitor_b. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 464: Analog Signal Monitor

    C00833/4 bGPDFlipFlop_InD bGPDFlipFlopOut C00833/5 bGPDFlipFlop_InClk C00833/6 bGPDFlipFlop_InClr bGPDFlipFlop_NegOut [7-24] GeneralPurpose function "D-FlipFlop" (clock-edge controlled) • For a detailed functional description see FB L_DFlipFlop. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 465: Counter

    L_Counter_1: Comparison 0: Greater than or equal to • Only available with TA "Table positioning". • For a detailed functional description see FB L_Counter. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 466: Basic Drive Functions (Mck)

    • Manual jog, e.g. for manual setting-up operation • Homing for positioning functions of the drive • Position profile generator for positioning functions of the drive Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 467: Basic Signal Flow

    These are visible in the FB Editor for monitoring purposes and must be connected to each other: [8-1] Interconnection of Motion Control Kernel and motor control function Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 468: Internal Interfaces | System Block "Ls_Motioncontrolkernel

    • Transfer is possible in any operating mode ("Homing on the fly"). • For this function, the dnPosRefValue_p_ output must be connected to the input of the same name of the SB LS_MotorInterface. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 469 Value for adaptation of torque limitation • Scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 % of the torque limit specified at the LS_MotorInterface system block via the nTorqueMotLimit_a and nTorqueGenLimit_a inputs. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 470 Input for Hardware limit switches (positive) BOOL bLimitSwitchNeg Input for Hardware limit switches (negative) BOOL bHomingMark Input for pre-stop mark/pre-stop signal for homing BOOL Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 471 BOOL (from version 06.00.00) • Only effective if bit 5 in C02582 is set to "1". FALSE Brake is released. TRUE Brake is applied. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 472 Additional status word WORD Status signal and actual-value signals from Motion Control Kernel functions nSpeedSet_v Speed setpoint selection in [increments/ms] • 16384 ≡ 15000 rpm Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 473 FBs that the gearbox direction of rotation is inverted is mostly done by selecting "motor mounting position inverted"). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 474: Mck Control Word

    SRampOverride 14 PosTeachSetPos "1" ≡ Teach MCK set position into the selected profile 15 PosTeachActPos "1" ≡ Teach current position into the selected profile Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 475 (Lenze setting: "WarningLocked").  Tip! Travel requests/profiles can also be started while the drive is running. The drive does not need to be at standstill. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 476: Mck Status Word

    • If the holding brake control sets a controller inhibit when the holding brake is closed, the internal "StandBy" operating mode is not assumed. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 477 • PosMode in the MCK control word = 0:  Use positioning mode set in C01300/x • Invalid PosMode in the MCK control word:  Error message "Ck09: Positioning mode invalid" Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 478: Status Bit "Homposavailable

    • Mains recovery at a cycle set unlike "0 units" in C1201/1 and if the position difference at reference recovery is higher than 1000 cycles. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 479: Status Bit "S_Shapingactive

     Profile completed (bit 9 is reset in case of profile restart and profile completion) [8-2] Example: Display of the rounding generated via the "S_ShapeActive" status bit Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 480: Status Bit "Breadytooperate

     Speed follower: Synchronisation active  Position follower: Synchronisation active BA 0 ... 5: Operating mode 0 ... 5 [8-3] Creation of the status bit bReadyToOperate Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 481: Mck State Machine

    Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Manual jog requested Homing requested Positioning requested Speed follower requested Position follower requested Stop requested [8-4] MCK state machine Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 482: Standby" Operating Mode

    [8-5] Example: Sensitivity threshold for speed transfer from the "StandBy" operating mode In the Lenze setting "0.5 %", the sensitivity threshold corresponds to approx. 7.5 rpm at a reference speed of 1500 rpm set in C00011. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 483: Interface To Safety System

    • In the "Position follower" operating mode, (forward) positioning to the signalled absolute position always takes place if this position differs from the internal position. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 484: Consideration Of Residual Value In Case Of External Profile Calculation

    Selection of the target position in [increments] for the "table positioning" application. The signal is available in the application level at the correspondent • dnPosProfilePosition output of the LA_TabPosIn application block. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 485: Mckinterface

    • Connection for limit switch & pre-stop mark for homing • Holding brake control  Output of status signals of the Motion Control Kernel Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 486 Output by the LS_MotionControlKernel, the status words wMotionState1 and wMotionState2 also constitute input information for the downstream L_MckStateInterface FB, which provides this information to the application in the form of process signals. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 487: Control Inputs | "L_Mckctrlinterface" Function Block

    In addition to the ORing of discrete input signals with the control word inputs, the FB has further functions that are described in the following subchapters. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 488 FALSE Speed 1 (C01231/1) active TRUE Speed 2 (C01231/2) active bReleaseLimitSwitch Manual jog: Retract operated limit switch BOOL TRUE Retract operated limit switch (in opposite direction) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 489 Positioning: Do not execute sequence profile (switch-off profile linkage) BOOL TRUE Evaluation of the sequence profile number parameterised in C01307/1...15 for the selected profile is suppressed. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 490 Stipulation of the profile to be executed • Optionally as a data word or binary coded. WORD • When the profile is stipulated, this FB carries out a mode change in the Lenze bProfileNo_1 setting at the same time: • If profile 0 is selected: Activation of "Speed follower" operating mode bProfileNo_8 •...
  • Page 491 FALSE Okay, no error BOOL TRUE • Plausibility check error or • control information error (in this case after ORing the individual signals with the control words) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 492: Alternative Functions For Control Bit "Posexecute

    = FALSE bHomingStartStop remains unchanged bPosTeachSetPos = TRUE (edge) bPosExecute = FALSE bPosExecute = FALSE bPosStop remains unchanged bHomingStartStop remains unchanged bPosTeachSetPos = FALSE Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 493: Operating Mode Change With Profile Number

    FB L_MckCtrlInterface). Note: These inputs are internally connected via OR-logic. Only connect one of these inputs to ensure non-ambiguous operating mode changeovers! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 494: Status Outputs | Fb "L_Mckstateinterface

    _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ _ 8.3.2 Status outputs | FB "L_MckStateInterface" This FB provides the application with different status information of the Motion Control Kernel via process outputs. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 495 C01296/2 > 0, dnPosOut_p is updated isochronously with the outputs wPosUnitsLW and wPosUnitsHW and hence not in a 1-ms cycle (not in real time)! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 496: Basic Settings

    Application Parameters on the dialog level Overview  Machine parameters:  Tip! You are provided with more detailed information on the machine parameters "Gearbox ratio" and "Feed constant" in the following subchapters. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 497 C00057 Maximum torque - Nm C01213/1 MCK: Max. traversing distance - units Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 498: Gearbox Ratio

    Example calculation on the basis of the technical gearbox data: Gearbox factor numerator (C01202/1) 6336 × × Gearbox factor denominator (C01202/2) × × [8-10] Calculation example (for 2-stage gearbox) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 499: Feed Constant

    [8-12] Schematic diagram: Feed constant for a spindle drive • In the case of a rotary table and its specification as an angle, the feed constant is = 360°/revolution. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 500: Activation Of The Modulo Measuring System

    The Modulo system is activated by setting a cycle (C01201/1) > 0 units. • The setting of the cycle is possible when the inverter is enabled. • When the cycle (C01201/1) is set to 0 units (Lenze setting), the traversing range is unlimited (classical measuring system).
  • Page 501 C01245/2 is taken into consideration if C02868/1: bit 5 (optimal procedure for multiple cycles) is set. Continuous 214748.3647 Relative Modulo position + defined position Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 502 Positioning mode "absolute (Cw)" Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4 Positioning mode "absolute (Ccw)" Case 1 Case 2 Case 3 Case 4 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 503: Min/Max Speed

    Sync C02611/3 C02611/4  Setpoint range  Synchronisation range [8-15] Example: Speed setpoint generation in the "Speed follower" operating mode (with nSpeedAddValue_v = 0) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 504: Limit Position Monitoring

     Actual position  C01229/1: Positive software limit position  C01229/2: Negative software limit position [8-16] Definition of the software limit position trigger limits Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 505 • The error message "Ck03: Pos. SW limit position" or "Ck04: Neg. SW limit position" is entered in the logbook of the inverter. • Depending on the parameterised fault response, the drive cannot traverse until the error has been acknowledged. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 506 Thus, an optionally set sequence profile can start and moves the drive into the valid software limit position range. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 507: Hardware Limit Switches

    10 ("Pos. HW-Limit Detected") or bit 11 ("Neg. HW-Limit Detected") in the MCK status word. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 508 Limit switch is activated and setpoint command has been transmitted Stop Setting of the operating mode Position follower Limit switch is activated and setpoint in direction of the activated limit switch is pending Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 509: Target Position Monitoring (Status "Drive In Target")

    FALSE  bInTarget C01244/1 TRUE FALSE  target position window (symmetrically around the target position; 2 x C01245/1)  dwell time [8-19] Signal characteristics Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 510 "0" is injected into the process, • a new homing process starts, • the reference is set, • the device is switched off/on. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 511: Monitoring Of The Maximum Travel Distance

    • The internal status "reference known" is reset (the inverter is no longer referenced). • A setting of C00595/7 = "0: No Reaction" deactivates the monitoring. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 512: Following Error Monitoring System

    MCK: Resp. to following error 2 Warning  Note! If the limit for the following error is set to "0.0000 units" (Lenze setting, the following error monitoring system is not active.  Tip! In certain situations (e.g. dynamic acceleration of the load), higher system-dependent following errors occur than while approaching the target position.

  • Page 513: Monitoring Of The Following Error In Case Of Controller Inhibit

    <> 0) in case of controller inhibit, the setpoint position is exactly in the target after 10 positioning processes and 9 x controller inhibits (in case of 10 x relative traverse paths). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 514: Setpoint Holdback For Bus Runtime Compensation

    A further delay between the reading of the received data and the forwarding to the control loops is caused by the internal cycle time of the inverters (1 ms for the 8400 device series). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 515 As the setpoint holdback is implemented in the Motion Control Kernel, the LS_MotionControlKernel system block is required for this function independent of the setpoint source. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 516 Effective setpoint of the motor control in the master  Effective setpoint of the motor control in the slave  [8-22] Example 1: Runtime behaviour without setpoint holdback Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 517 Effective setpoint of the motor control in the master  Effective setpoint of the motor control in the slave  [8-23] Example 2: Runtime behaviour with setpoint holdback = 2 ms Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 518: Setting Or Activation Of Maximum Jerk For Traversing Profiles

    If the sequence profile is started with a non-accelerated drive, the parameters of the sequence profile are continued to be used for the jerk calculation without maximum comparison to the current profile. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 519: Speed Follower

    Bit 7 Position controller off In the "Speed follower" operating mode, the position controller is deactivated. Thus, the compensation of the following error is switched off. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 520: Requesting The Operating Mode

    The synchronisation mode serves to travel the synchronisation range dynamically with the synchronisation ramp set in C02610/2. Min/Max speed ( 503) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 521: Homing

    Note! Currently, the 8400 protec HighLine inverter only supports the evaluation of incremental signals (encoder). The home position is always deleted after mains switching. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 522: Parameter Setting

    0.0000 units C01246/1 MCK: Ref. TP signal source (from version 06.00.00) 0: No TP C01246/2 MCK: Set.Ref. signal source (from version 06.00.00) 0: No TP Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 523: Functional Settings

    Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 SW limits inactive after Ref Ok After detecting the reference signal, the software limit positions are deactivated. Bit 9 Bit 15 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 524: Referencing Mode

    • The edge sensitivity of this input and the response to the pre- switch off signal depend on the selected homing mode (see the following description of the homing modes). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 525 C01225/2 is that deceleration to search speed takes place quickly and position detection is exact (at slower search speed). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 526 1. Movement in negative direction with search profile data set. 2. Negative edge at bHomingMark enables home position detection. 3. Following edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 527 1. Movement in positive direction with search profile data set. 2. Negative edge at bHomingMark enables home position detection. 3. Following edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 528 2. Positive edge at bHomingMark activates search profile data set for further reference search. 3. Negative edge at bHomingMark enables home position detection. 4. Following edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 529 Active Active Procedure: 1. Movement in negative direction with start profile data set. 2. Following edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 530 3. Negative edge of the travel range limit switch enables home position detection. 4. Following edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 531 3. Negative edge of the travel range limit switch enables home position detection. 4. Following edge of the touch probe sensor sets home position. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 532 • It is possible that, as a result, the machine will remain on an operated limit switch. • It is therefore recommended that a home value offset be set in C01227/1 in order to release the operated limit switch. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 533 • It is possible that, as a result, the machine will remain on an operated limit switch. • It is therefore recommended that a home value offset be set in C01227/1 in order to release the operated limit switch. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 534  Effective torque limit [8-26] Wiring for torque limit when homing to "Positive stop" (homing modes 14/15) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 535 When the drive is at standstill, the measuring system is set via the bit 8 ("HomStartStop") in control word. The current actual position now corresponds to the home position set in C01227/2 the machine measuring system. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 536: Home Position & Home Value Offset

    4 / 5 dnActPos_p - dnActPos_p (TP/MP) (bHomingMark_TRUE_to_FALSE) 6 / 7 dnActPos_p - dnActPos_p (TP/MP) (bHomingMark_TRUE_to_FALSE) dnActPos_p - dnActPos_p (TP/MP) (bLimitSwitchPos_TRUE_to_FALSE) dnActPos_p - dnActPos_p (TP/MP) (bLimitSwitchNeg_TRUE_to_FALSE) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 537: Option "Actual Mctrl Position Received At Mains Switch-Off

    If the MCKInterface is connected upstream to the Motion Control Kernel and if the operating mode is requested at the L_MckCtrlInterface FB, the wOperationMode and bOperationMode_1...8 process inputs are available. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 538: Execute Homing

    FALSETRUE The internal status "reference known" is reset. • The inverter is no longer referenced. • The process outputs bHomePosAvailable and bHomingDone are reset to FALSE. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 539: Homing On The Fly

    • Instead of using bit 9 in the MCK control word, the home position can also be set via a touch probe signal. The setting is made in C01246/2. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 540: Manual Jog

    If travel range monitoring has been deactivated, the drive can travel into a mechanical limit during manual jogging and machine parts can be destroyed or damaged! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 541: Parameter Setting

    Manual jog: Breakpoint 4 0.0000 unit  Note! For trouble-free operation, the Machine parameters (at least gearbox factor and feed constant) must also be set correctly! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 542: Functional Settings

    Bit 7 Position controller off In the "manual jog" operating mode, the position controller is deactivated. Thus, the compensation of the following error is switched off. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 543: Smooth Start And Quick Stop Of The Drive

    ManJogPos TRUE FALSE ManExecute2ndSpeed TRUE FALSE  C01231/1: Manual jog: Speed 1  C01231/2: Manual jog: Speed 2 [8-30] Example: Change-over to second speed Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 544: Time-Based Start Of Second Speed

    2 so that it is higher than manual jog speed 1, you can enable longer distances to be travelled by means of manual jogging with this function. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 545: Requesting The Operating Mode

    FALSE Speed 1 (C01231/1) active. TRUE Speed 2 (C01231/2) active. bReleaseLimitSwitch Retract operated limit switch BOOL TRUE Retract operated limit switch (in opposite direction) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 546: Manual Jog To Limit Position

    (C01232/2) to the position ManJogPos of the corresponding software limit TRUE position. FALSE  Positive software limit position [8-32] Example: Manual jog to positive software limit position Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 547: Retracting Of An Operated Limit Switch

    A limit switch that is in the operated state can also be moved away from again through manual jogging in the retracting direction by means of control bits 4/5 (ManJogPos/ManJogNeg). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 548: Positioning

    • 15 different profiles can be parameterised for the 8400 protec HighLine inverter. • You can find a detailed explanation of all profile parameters in the subchapter entitled "Profile entry". ( 552) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 549: Possible Motion Profiles

    • with speed override in profile 2 Œ  Ž Profile linkage • here: forwards/backwards profile Œ  [8-34] Examples of possible motion profiles Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 550: Parameter Setting

    Greyed out = display parameter  Note! For trouble-free operation, the Machine parameters (at least gearbox factor and feed constant) must also be set correctly! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 551: Functional Settings

    Continuing the setpoint Positioning from the setpoint printed in bold = Lenze setting; x = any state; * see note on bit 4 in table above Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 552: Profile Entry

    Profile data set (profile numbers 1 ... 15), in which the profile data are stored. Mode (C01300/1...15) Selection of the way in which positioning is to be carried out. Positioning modes ( 555) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 553  Constant acceleration (L-profile) v [unit/s]  Linearly increasing acceleration (S-profile) Œ t [s] v [unit/s]  t [s] Deceleration (C01304/1...15) Maximum deceleration during the positioning process. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 554 TP signal source (C01309/1...15) Selection of the signal source for touch probe detection. • Only relevant for positioning modes with touch-probe. Touch probe positioning ( 556) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 555: Positioning Modes

    • Reference for the absolute position is the zero position. 12 Absolute (Ccw) on TP • In this direction, the zero position of the axis can be exceeded. (from version 06.00.00) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 556: Touch Probe Positioning

    In the Lenze setting of C02810/x, no touch probe is detected! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 557: S-Ramp Time For Jerk Limitation

    (Dec) 4. Reduce acceleration (jerk limitation) 8 Reduce deceleration (jerk limitation) 5th Traversing with Vel according to speed profile 9 Standstill (position target reached) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 558  t = 1 s jerk_max For this reason, you must only set plausible S-ramp times (this should not exceed half the value of t Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 559: Requesting The Operating Mode

    The profile 0 is no valid profile for the "positioning" operating mode. If a driving request with an invalid profile number is started, the response set in C00595/12 occurs (Lenze setting: "WarningLocked"). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 560: Starting/Cancelling A Traversing Task

    Related topics: Target position monitoring (status "drive in target") ( 509) Monitoring of the maximum travel distance ( 511) Following error monitoring system ( 512) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 561: Override Of The Parameterised Positioning Mode

    Relative to TP Absolute (Cw) to TP Absolute (Ccw) to TP * From version 06.00.00 All other possible settings are reserved for future extensions! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 562: Position Teaching

    BOOL TRUE Teach current position into the selected profile.  Note! If request is made at the same time, the current position is taught. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 563: Stop

    If the MCKInterface is connected upstream to the Motion Control Kernel and if the operating mode is requested at the L_MckCtrlInterface FB, the wOperationMode and bOperationMode_1...8 process inputs are available. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 564: Position Follower

     Phase 1: assume synchronous position. In this phase, dnPosSetValue_p = constant.  Phase 2: position follower operation [8-35] Signal flow - position follower Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 565: Parameter Setting

    If this function is activated via bit 7 in C01218, the position controller is deactivated in this operating mode. Hence, following error control is switched-off. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 566: Requesting The Operating Mode

    If the bDeltaPosOn process input is set to TRUE, a position difference (following error) is compensated for which is not internally generated from setpoint/actual positions but must be defined via the dnDeltaPos_p process input instead. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 567: Override

    • Synchronising processes • Setpoint controls via external setpoints • Abort via input bPosStop • Speed setpoint selection in case of error (e. g. "Fail-QSP") Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 568: Speed Override

    Deactivating the override within the braking/deceleration ramp does not have any effect. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 569: Acceleration Override

    "Ramping up" from the acceleration defined with override to the acceleration set in the profile takes place immediately in this case. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 570: S-Ramp Smoothing Override

    If control bit 13 (EnableSRampOverride) is reset to "0", the S-ramp time specified by means of the profile parameters is used for profile generation. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 571: Holding Brake Control

    Examples: • Loss of the reference information after mains OFF and further spinning of the drive. • Collision with other moving machine parts. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 572: Internal Interfaces

    • For speed control: 100 % ≡ reference speed (C00011) • For torque control: 100 % ≡ maximum torque (C00057) Feedforward control of the motor before release Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 573 Both times must also be considered for parameterising the closing and opening time of the holding brake Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 574: Parameter Setting

    Holding brake: FF control starting value 1 C02581/5 Holding brake: FF control starting value 2 C02582 Holding brake: Setting Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 575: Operating Mode

    • The bMBrakeReleased status signal is set to FALSE.  Note! In the Lenze setting, the mode 0 is preset to get into a safe state after the mains is switched on. Mode 11: Manual control In this mode, brake release and brake application can be directly controlled via the bMBrakeRelease input without special logic or automatic.
  • Page 576 • the brake in this mode also closes when the controller is inhibited in order to prevent the axis in a hoist from falling. Related topics: ( 119) TroubleQSP Behaviour in case of pulse inhibit ( 586) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 577: Functional Settings

    • "0" ≡ As before, the ramp time set in C02610/1 is used. Note: The changeover can be dynamically both via the ramp parameter and via bit 6. Bit 7 Reserved Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 578: Switching Thresholds

    Related topics: Process when brake is released ( 583) Process when brake is closed ( 584) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 579: Application And Release Time

    • Contact elements used (brake module or contactor at the digital output) • Type of overvoltage limitation/suppressor circuit For optimisation purposes, detect in individual cases the response times by measurement. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 580 [8-39] Oscillogram 2: Current characteristic for the release of a mechanical holding brake (release time: 36.8 ms) Related topics: Process when brake is released ( 583) Process when brake is closed ( 584) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 581: Ramp Time For Approaching The Setpoint Speed

    • Mechanical delay of the holding brake itself • Generation of the holding torque by the motor Related topics: Process when brake is released ( 583) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 582: Motor Magnetising Time (Only With Asynchronous Motor)

    In the Lenze setting, the actual speed time monitoring is deactivated (C02593/1 = "0 s"), i.e. the brake will only be applied when the actual speed has reached the lower switching threshold. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 583: Process When Brake Is Released

     C02610/1: Ramp time for approaching the setpoint speed [8-41] Release holding brake in automatic mode via speed threshold Related topics: Feedforward control of the motor before release ( 587) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 584: Process When Brake Is Closed

     C02581/3: Hysteresis for application  C02593/2: Application delay  C02589/1: Application time [8-42] Close holding brake in automatic mode via speed threshold (actual value = setpoint) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 585  C02593/1: Actual value monitoring time  C02589/1: Application time [8-43] Close holding brake in automatic mode with actual value monitoring time (C02593/1 > 0 s) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 586: Behaviour In Case Of Pulse Inhibit

    In case of vertical motion (bit 3 = 0), this function is not active due to safety-related reasons. Related topics: Functional settings ( 577) Switching thresholds ( 578) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 587: Feedforward Control Of The Motor Before Release

    If such scenarios are not excluded in applications, you should not use the automatic storage of the holding torque. • Alternatively use the manual selection (C02582: bit 4 = 1). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 588 If the servo control (SC) operating mode has been selected, an additive torque value in [%] can be selected via the nBrkTorqueAdd_a input. Related topics: Functional settings ( 577) Switching thresholds ( 578) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 589: Diagnostics & Error Management

    For many device errors, the error type and hence the response of the inverter to the error can be parameterised. Setting the error response ( 612) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 590: Led Status Displays

    Warning/trouble/fault S-Acknw Yellow Acknowledgement of a parameter set acceptance is required S-Enable Yellow blinking Safety function system active (unsafe display) Inverter is enabled Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 591 Device state machine and device states ( 111) CANopen option ( 668) PROFIBUS/PROFINET option ( 748) Drive-based safety ( 757) I/O terminals ( 331) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 592: Led Status Displays Of The Device Status

    LED is flashing twice approx. every 1.25 seconds (double flash) LED is blinking every second LED is permanently on Related topics: Device state machine and device states ( 111) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 593: Drive Diagnostics Via The Integrated 7-Segment Display

    • This display has the highest priority and overrides the two other modes. Detailed information on the different modes can be found in the following sections. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 594 S4: Motor voltage in [V] "u 358" = Motor voltage 358 V S5: DC-bus voltage in [V] "U 558" = DC-bus voltage 558 V Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 595 ( 623) • Example: "2 OH3" = In case of the device on node address 2, the warning "OH3: Motor temperature (X21) triggered" is active. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 596: Drive Diagnostics With The "Engineer

    Resetting an error Acknowledge error message (if the error cause has been eliminated). Logbook... Display the Logbook of the inverter. ( 602) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 597 The online connection to the inverter can be established via the following device interfaces: • Diagnostic interface X70 • CANopen option ( 668) • PROFIBUS/PROFINET option ( 748) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 598: Display Details Of The Error

    Related topics: Structure of the 32-bit error number (bit coding) ( 617) Structure of the 16 bit error number (bit coding) ( 620) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 599: Drive Diagnostics Via Keypad/Bus System

    The power outputs are inhibited.  Fault Fault ( 121)  Trouble Trouble ( 120)  TroubleQSP TroubleQSP ( 119)  Warning is active Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 600 Switching cycles mains switching C00177/2 Switching cycles output relay C00177/3 Stress counter - short circuit C00177/4 Stress counter - earth fault C00177/5 Stress meter clamp Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 601 Firmware of the control card and the power section C00203/1...9 Product type code of the individual device components C00204/1...9 Serial numbers of the individual device components Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 602: Logbook

    This ensures that the error history of the device does not get lost. For this reason it is very important to act with caution when deleting the logbook entries. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 603: Filtering Logbook Entries

    Lenze setting. Instead, one counter will be counted up for this error. The time of the error is always the time of its first occurrence. A new logbook line will only be generated if an error occurs that differs from the previous error.

  • Page 604: Automatic Recording Of Device-Internal Signals At The Time The Error Occurs

    • Scaling of the value recorded: 0 ≡ FALSE; 1 ≡ TRUE • The analog signal to be recorded is selected in C00164/1. • Scaling of the value recorded: 16384 ≡ 100 % Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 605: Reading Out Logbook Entries

    Storing the logbook in the project ( 607) Delete Delete all entries available in the logbook. Configuration of... Open parameterisation dialog for configuring the logbook. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 606: Exporting Logbook Entries To A File

    5. Subject matter 13. Digital value 1 6. Error text 14. Source - digital value 2 7. Time stamp 15. Digital value 2 8. Relative time Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 607: Storing The Logbook In The Project

    • When the project is closed, you are asked to save the changed project. • Only if the changed project is saved, the new logbook entries stored in the project remain stored. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 608: Reading Out The Logbook From An External Control/Visualisation

    (scaling: 16384 ≡ 100 %) DWORD 6 Source - digital value Reserved Digital value 1 Reserved DWORD 7 Source - digital value Reserved Digital value 2 Reserved Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 609 • The "Response index" query ensures that the logbook entry read really corresponds to the logbook entry requested. Related topics: Structure of the 32-bit error number (bit coding) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 610: Monitoring

    Motor phase failure monitoring ( 316) Mains phase failure monitoring ( 319) Maximum current monitoring ( 319) Maximum torque monitoring ( 321) Encoder open-circuit monitoring ( 322) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 611: Monitoring Configuration

    • The 8400 monitoring configuration dialog box is displayed via which the desired settings can be made: Related topics: Setting the error response ( 612) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 612: Setting The Error Response

    • The corresponding preset threshold values can be changed via the following parameters: Parameters Info C00120 Setting of motor overload (I²xt) C00123 Device utilisat. threshold (Ixt) C00572 Brake resistor overload threshold C00599 Motor phase failure threshold Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 613: Autofailreset Function

    • 2: WarningLocked • 3: All locking C00189 Response after max. number of unsuccessful error reset processes has been reached Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 614: Maloperation Of The Drive

    C00090: Rated motor voltage C00091: Motor cosine phi C00092: Motor magnetising inductance Motor windings are wired incorrectly Reverse from star connection to delta connection Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 615 Motor phase (LP1) Monitoring is not active (C00597 = 0) Activate monitoring (C00597 = 1) monitoring does not respond if the motor phases are interrupted Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 616: Operation Without Mains Supply

    Motor current C00058 Output frequency C00061 Heatsink temperature C00064/1...3 Device utilisation (Ixt) C00066 Thermal motor load (I²xt) C00177 Switching cycles C00725 Current switching frequency Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 617: Error Messages Of The Operating System

    • For the sake of legibility, the error number in the logbook and in C00165 is displayed with the following syntax: [Error type].[Error subject area no.].[Error ID] Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 618 User error 4 User error 5 Errors generated by the user (by the application) via the LS_SetError_2 system block. User error 8 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 619 • Thus, error number "142278671" means: A DC bus undervoltage has been detected in the "Motor management / encoder" subject area. The error response is a "Fault". Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 620: Structure Of The 16 Bit Error Number (Bit Coding)

    Errors that are reported by the extension module, and Yes if it is a fieldbus error. communication errors to the plugged-in extension module. CAN integrated (general) Errors related to general CAN functions. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 621: Reset Error Message

    When an online connection to the inverter has been established, use the Diagnostics tab of »Engineer« and click Reset error to reset a pending error message. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 622: Export Error Texts

    • Font (UTF8, standard font or ASCII) 3. Click OK to start the export. • After the export, a message appears indicating whether the export was successful. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 623: Short Overview (A-Z)

    C00595/14 0x8600 xx.0184.00015 0x5405 21509 12058629 Ck15: Error message sig. brake TroubleQuickStop 0x8600 xx.0184.00005 0x5440 21568 12058688 Ck16: Time overrun manual operation Fault xx.0184.00064 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 624 5889 8060929 ot1: Max. torque reached No Reaction C00608 0x8300 xx.0123.00001 0x175d 5981 8061021 ot2: Speed controller output limited No Reaction C00567 0xF000 xx.0123.00093 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 625 + C161/8* User error 8 No Reaction C00581/8 0x6200 xx.0987.00004 * Only the lower 8 bits of the adjustable error ID (C161/x) can be used. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 626: Cause & Possible Remedies

     0: No Reaction  1: Fault  2: Trouble  3: TroubleQuickStop  4: WarningLocked  5: Warning  6: Information Cause Remedy User error 4 has been tripped via the bSetError4 input of User-defined. LS_SetError_1 system block. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 627  0: No Reaction  1: Fault  2: Trouble  3: TroubleQuickStop  4: WarningLocked  5: Warning  6: Information Cause Remedy One mains phase of a three-phase supply has failed. Check mains connection (plug X10). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 628 Prevent further heating, i.e. reduce motor load or set the shutdown temperature of the motor. controller inhibit so that the heatsink can cool down again. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 629 • Wrong dimensioning of the device with regard to its • Reduce motor load cycles (observe load cycles motor load. according to documentation). • Load cycles are not complied with. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 630 • Depending on the configuration of the auto-start lock function, set C00142 so that, when this error is tripped, the inverter only restarts after the controller inhibit has been switched. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 631 (clamp disconnection). load with regard to the installed device power. • Reduce the dynamics of the setpoint change or speed control. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 632 • This cancels the identification process. The Lenze • Do not execute any device function which may setting of the motor data is used. activate controller inhibit. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 633 • Check terminals of the brake resistor. • Short circuit at the terminals of the brake resistor. • Check brake resistor. • Low-resistance brake resistor. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 634  0: No Reaction  1: Fault  2: Trouble  3: TroubleQuickStop  4: WarningLocked  5: Warning  6: Information Cause Remedy Load-dependent switching frequency reduction • Observe load requirements. • Correct dimensioning or reduce setpoint generation dynamics if necessary. Motor control Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 635 The drive is at the torque limit in • Correct dimensioning or reduce setpoint from the the field weakening range. field weakening range if necessary. Motor control Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 636 HTL encoder is not used. stop (mode 14/15) and a waiting time (C01223) >100 ms. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 637 • Switch off inverter, correctly plug in the module, switch on the inverter again. • Switch mains or restart inverter. • Replace module/inverter. • Please contact Lenze if the problem occurs again. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 638  0: No Reaction  1: Fault  2: Trouble  3: TroubleQuickStop  4: WarningLocked  5: Warning  6: Information Cause Remedy interface: The device has received the "Stop Remote Check CAN master (NMT master). Node" NMT telegram. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 639 • RPDO3 has not been received within the monitoring • Eliminate electrical interference (e.g. EMC). time set in C00357/3 or was faulty. • Adjust monitoring time C00357/3 or switch off time monitoring. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 640 "copy parameter set" function of the keypad. Make sure that you do not use functions that are not available in the older device. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 641 The parameter set in the device is invalid. Please contact Lenze. • The error occurs while loading the parameter set. • One code in the device is incorrect. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 642  0: No Reaction  1: Fault  2: Trouble  3: TroubleQuickStop  4: WarningLocked  5: Warning  6: Information Cause Remedy Device error • Reduce switching frequency (C00018) to 4 kHz. • Please contact Lenze if the problem occurs again. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 643  0: No Reaction  1: Fault  2: Trouble  3: TroubleQuickStop  4: WarningLocked  5: Warning  6: Information Cause Remedy Device error Please contact Lenze. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 644 Reset error message and retract limit switch. direction has tripped. • The bLimitSwitchPos input for travel range monitoring via positive hardware limit switch has been set to FALSE (fail-safe). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 645 Positioning profile is started in positioning mode 5 or 12 Start positioning with zero speed. (absolute (Ccw) or absolute (Ccw) to TP); however, the Cw rotating direction is defined by the profile generation. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 646 Remedy MCK: Following error limit 2 (C01215/2) has been • Optimise control mode. exceeded. • Increase following error limit. • Deactivate following error monitoring. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 647 On cause 4: • Ensure that the corresponding profile parameters for speed, acceleration and deceleration are set to non- zero when starting a traversing process. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 648 The inverter must be replaced because the output for the motor holding brake is not available anymore. Possible causes: • Overload of the output, for instance by a short circuit. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 649  0: No Reaction  1: Fault  2: Trouble  3: TroubleQuickStop  4: WarningLocked  5: Warning  6: Information Cause Remedy Device error Please contact Lenze. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 650: Ls_Seterror_1" System Block

    65535 Error ID for user errors 1 ... 4 C00581/1...4 Response to user errors 1 ... 4 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 651: Ls_Seterror_2" System Block

    65535 Error ID for user errors 5 ... 8 C00581/5...8 Response to user errors 5 ... 8 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 2 Trouble 3 TroubleQuickStop 4 WarningLocked 5 Warning 6 Information Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 652: Oscilloscope Function

    • Linking channel values with arithmetic operations (addition, subtraction and multiplication) • Simple signal analysis by frequency transformation of time signals with FFT ("Fast Fourier Transformation"). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 653: Technical Data

     Note! Recording can only be started when an online connection has been established to the 8400 protec HighLine. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 654: User Interface

    Selecting the signal sources to be recorded  Status bar  Input field for comments Last settings   Settings Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 655 • The settings are transferred to the device and the recording is started. Stop recording Oscilloscope settings • Cyclic recording of oscillograms • Always load oscillograms after recording is completed without a query Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 656: Selecting The Signal Sources To Be Recorded

    • The position value determines the vertical position of the zero point of the y axis of a curve with regard to the vertical curve scale (- 5 ... + 5). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 657: Selecting The Recording Time/Sample Rate

    If the Last settings tab is in the foreground, click the Settings tab to show the input fields for configuring the trigger condition. The Settings tab contains the button which serves to import settings from a loaded oscillogram. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 658 For triggering on a different signal source: • The current value must be different than the last value in order that the trigger is activated. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 659: Starting Recording

    If required, the representation can now be adjusted by using the zoom or the automatic scaling function. Zoom function  Go to the oscilloscope toolbar and click the icon to activate the zoom function. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 660 4. Go to the oscilloscope toolbar and click the arrow next to the symbol to set all the displayed curves to the Y position "0". This way, the curves are displayed "above one another". Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 661: Cursor Function: Reading Individual Measured Values

    • The status bar displays the position of both measuring lines and the difference between them. 2. Select the channel for which individual measured values are to be indicated from the Channel list field. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 662: Last Settings

    10.2.9 Last settings All information included in the Last settings tab refer to the oscillogram loaded into the device: The contents cannot be changed. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 663: Managing Oscillograms

    The Comment text field serves to enter a comment on the selected oscillogram. • If you execute the Saving the oscillogram in a file command, the comment is saved together with the oscillogram in the file. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 664: Saving The Oscillogram In A File

    • A new window opens in which the directory and the file name for the oscillogram to be saved have to the specified. 3. Click the Save button. • The dialog box is closed and the current oscillogram is saved. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 665: Loading The Oscillogram File

    • If the configuration to be loaded contains signal sources that are no longer available in the device, these variables are automatically removed from the configuration. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 666: Overlay Function

    • Removing signal sources from the device oscillogram causes the characteristics in the MERGE oscillogram to be deleted. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 667: Deleting An Oscillogram File Saved In The Project

    2. Select one or several oscillogram files from the upper list field. 3. Press the Delete selected file... button. • The selected file(s) is/are deleted and the dialog box is closed. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 668: Canopen Option

    • Pay attention to notes in the hardware manual for EMC- compliant wiring and short cable lengths as there is no isolation towards the control electronics of the inverter. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 669: General Information

    Adjustable baud rates 20*, 50, 125, 250, 500, 800*, 1000* kbps (* from HighLine onwards) • adjustable via DIP switches or via code C00351. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 670: Supported Protocols

    Transmitting and receiving a sync telegram • Synchronisation of the internal time base to the reception of the CAN sync telegram is possible.Synchronisation of the internal time base Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 671: Communication Time

    • For parameters concerning the motor control (e.g. C00011), the processing time may be longer (up to 30 ms). • Process data: 1 ms Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 672: Possible Settings Via Dip Switch

    "R" DIP switch. DIP switch position ("R"): • OFF = bus terminating resistor is inactive • ON = bus terminating resistor is active Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 673: Setting The Baud Rate

    Example: Setting of the node address 23 DIP switch Switch position Value Node address = Sum of the values = 16 + 4 + 2 + 1 = 23 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 674: Led Status Displays For The System Bus

    (BUS-ERR is blinking twice, then off for 1 second) Sync Message Error (only possible in the "Operational" state) (BUS-ERR is blinking three times, then off for 1 second) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 675: Going Online Via The System Bus

    = "1: On / start" device command reinitialises the CANopen interface of the inverter ("Reset node"), which is required after e.g. changing the data transfer rate, the node address or the identifiers, respectively. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 676: Structure Of The Can Data Telegram

    Exception: The identifier for process data/heartbeat/emergency objects as well as network management and sync telegrams is freely assigned by the user (either manually or automatically by the network configurator), or is permanently assigned. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 677 • The basic identifiers for network management (NMT) and the basic SDO channel (SDO1) are defined in the CANopen protocol and cannot be changed. • The basic identifiers of the PDOs are preset in the Lenze setting according to the "Predefined Connection Set" of DS301 V4.02.

  • Page 678: User Data

    • Parameter data are, for instance, operating parameters, diagnostic information and motor data as well as control information on the interconnection of function blocks in the I/O level of the FB Editor. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 679: Communication Phases/Network Management

    Part of the initialisation or the entire initialisation can be carried out anew in every status by transferring the corresponding network management telegrams. The current CAN status is displayed in C00359 for diagnostic purposes. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 680: Status Transitions

    The status of all nodes can be changed at the same time. • xx = Node ID: If a node address is specified, only the status of the node with the corresponding address changes. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 681: Network Management Telegram (Nmt)

    "Operational" communication status, the identifier and user data in the transmission telegram must be set as follows: • Identifier: 0x00 (network management) • User data: 0x0100 ("Start remote node" NMT command to all nodes) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 682: Parameterising The Inverter As Can Master

    "Reset node" NMT telegram for the reinitialisation of the CAN-specific device parameters.  Tip! Master functionality is only required during the initialisation phase of the drive system. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 683: Process Data Transfer

    • Transmit PDOs (TPDOx): Process data object sent by a node  Note! Data can only be exchanged via process data objects if the status is "Operational"! Communication phases/network management ( 679) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 684: Available Process Data Objects

    • For a predefined assignment, see the wDeviceStatusWord status word of the drive interface. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 685: Rpdo1 | "Lp_Canin1" Port Block

    LP_CanIn1: Mapping selection CanIn C00409/1 LP_CanIn1: wCtrl MapVal C00409/2 LP_CanIn1: wIn2 MapVal C00409/3 LP_CanIn1: wIn3 MapVal C00409/4 LP_CanIn1: wIn4 MapVal Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 686 From version 12.00.00 • The mapping for the double word is ORed with the mapping setting in C00409/3 C00409/4. Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 687: Rpdo2 | "Lp_Canin2" Port Block

    LP_CanIn2: Mapping selection CanIn C00409/5 LP_CanIn2: wIn1 MapVal C00409/6 LP_CanIn2: wIn2 MapVal C00409/7 LP_CanIn2: wIn3 MapVal C00409/8 LP_CanIn2: wIn4 MapVal Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 688 From version 12.00.00 • The mapping for the double word is ORed with the mapping setting in C00409/7 C00409/8. Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 689: Rpdo3 | "Lp_Canin3" Port Block

    LP_CanIn3: Mapping selection CanIn C00409/9 LP_CanIn3: wIn1 MapVal C00409/10 LP_CanIn3: wIn2 MapVal C00409/11 LP_CanIn3: wIn3 MapVal C00409/12 LP_CanIn3: wIn4 MapVal Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 690 From version 12.00.00 • The mapping for the double word is ORed with the mapping setting in C00409/11 C00409/12. Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 691: Rpdo4 | "Lp_Canin4" Port Block

    LP_CanIn4: Mapping Selection CanIn C00409/13 LP_CanIn4: wIn1 MapVal C00409/14 LP_CanIn4: wIn2 MapVal C00409/15 LP_CanIn4: wIn3 MapVal C00409/16 LP_CanIn4: wIn4 MapVal Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 692 LP_CanIn4: dwIn34 MapVal • The mapping for the double word is ORed with the mapping setting in C00409/15 C00409/16. Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 693: Tpdo1 | "Lp_Canout1" Port Block

    Short overview of the parameters for LP_CanOut1: Parameters Info Lenze setting C00401/2 LP_CanOut1: Inversion bState_B0..15 0x0000 C00868/1 LP_CanOut1:wState C00868/2 LP_CanOut1:wOut2 C00868/3 LP_CanOut1:wOut3 C00868/4 LP_CanOut1: wOut4 Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 694: Tpdo2 | "Lp_Canout2" Port Block

    Lenze setting C00401/4 LP_CanOut2: Inversion bOut1_B0..15 0x0000 C00868/5 LP_CanOut2: wOut1 C00868/6 LP_CanOut2: wOut2 C00868/7 LP_CanOut2: wOut3 C00868/8 LP_CanOut2: wOut4 Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 695: Tpdo3 | "Lp_Canout3" Port Block

    Lenze setting C00401/6 LP_CanOut3: Inversion bOut1_B0..15 0x0000 C00868/9 LP_CanOut3: wOut1 C00868/10 LP_CanOut3: wOut2 C00868/11 LP_CanOut3: wOut3 C00868/12 LP_CanOut3: wOut4 Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 696: Tpdo4 | "Lp_Canout4" Port Block

    Lenze setting C00401/8 LP_CanOut4: Inversion bOut1_B0..15 0x0000 C00868/13 LP_CanOut4: wOut1 C00868/14 LP_CanOut4: wOut2 C00868/15 LP_CanOut4: wOut3 C00868/16 LP_CanOut4: wOut4 Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 697: Identifiers Of The Process Data Objects

    • Identifier (COB-ID) = C0354/x Lenze setting: Basic identifiers according to the "Predefined Connection Set" of DS301 V4.02 In the Lenze setting, the identifiers for the process data objects PDO1 ... PDO4 consist of the node address set in C00350 and a basic identifier (CANBaseID) which corresponds to the "Predefined...
  • Page 698 After a node address change (C00350) and a CAN reset node afterwards, the subcodes of C00354 automatically resume the values which result from the respective basic identifier and the set node address. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 699: Transmission Type

    For a cyclic transmission, a cycle time must be entered for the respective PDO. In this case, cyclic transmission takes place in addition to event-controlled transmission. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 700 The communication parameters can also be set via the following CANopen objects: • I-1400 ... I-1403: Communication parameters for RPDO1 ... RPDO4 • I-1800 ... I-1803: Communication parameters for TPDO1 ... TPDO4 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 701: Synchronisation Of Pdos Via Sync Telegram

    CAN SYNC Tx identifier 0x0080  C00369 CAN sync transmission cycle time 0 ms  Related topics: Synchronisation of the internal time base ( 755) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 702: Monitoring Of The Rpdos For Data Reception

    Bit 10  Reserved Bit 11  Reserved Bit 12  Reserved Bit 13  Reserved Bit 14  Trouble Bit 15  Fault Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 703  Exception event (an error has occurred) [11-7] General signal flow in the event of a configured exception Related topics: Configuring exception handling of the output terminals ( 367) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 704: Parameter Data Transfer

    In the Lenze setting, only the parameter data channel 1 is activated according to CANopen. • In C00366, set "2 SDO Lenze" to activate both parameter data channels. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 705: Identifiers Of The Parameter Data Objects

    11.9.1 Identifiers of the parameter data objects In the Lenze setting, the basic identifiers of the SDOs are preset according to the "Predefined Connection Set". The identifiers of the parameter data objects SDO1 and SDO2 result from the basic identifier and...

  • Page 706: Command

    (shortened block service) s: segmented (normal block service)  Tip! More commands are defined in CANopen specification DS301, V4.02 (e.g. segmented transfer). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 707: Addressing By Means Of Index And Subindex

    4th byte 5th byte 6. byte 7th byte 8th byte Command Index Subindex Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 0xF4 0x5F 0x00 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 708: Data 1

    4th byte 5th byte 6. byte 7th byte 8th byte Command Index Subindex Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 0x39 0x30 0x00 0x00 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 709: Error Messages

    1st byte 2nd byte 3rd byte 4th byte 5th byte 6. byte 7th byte 8th byte Command Index Subindex Error code 0x41 0x00 0x04 0x06 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 710 Dynamic generation of object directory failed or no object directory available (e.g. object directory generated from file, generation not possible because of a file error). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 711: Parameter Data Telegram Examples

    = 0x4B = "Read Response" (response to the read request with current value) Index as in telegram to the drive Subindex Data 1 ... 2 = 0x002B = 43 [°C] Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 712: Write Parameters

    (1408 = SDO1 basic identifier from the inverter) Command = 0x60 = "Write response" (Acknowledgement of the write access from the inverter) Index as in telegram to the drive Subindex Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 713: Read Block Parameters

    Index as in telegram to the drive Subindex Data 1 ... 4 = 0x0000000B = data length of 11 characters in the ASCII format Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 714 • The 2nd response of the inverter in the command byte is "0b00011*0000" if bytes 2 ... 8 are completely filled with data and other telegrams are following. * Toggle bit Data 1 ... 7 = "01.00.0" (ASCII representation) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 715 • Bits 1 ... 3 reveal the number of bytes that do not contain any data anymore. * Toggle bit Data 1 ... 7 = "0.00" (ASCII representation) The result of the data block transmission is: "01.00.00.00" Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 716: Monitoring

    • EMC interferences on the system bus (e.g. since the CAN bus cable next to the motor cable is unshielded.) C00364 displays whether such an error is active. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 717: Heartbeat Protocol

    Decimal value Producer status (s) Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Boot-up Stopped Operational Pre-Operational Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 718: Parameter Setting

    • The NMT master receives an emergency telegram containing emergency error code 0x8130. • The response parameterised in C00592/5 is activated (Lenze setting: "No response"). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 719: Commissioning Example

    • The heartbeat telegram of the producer has the following identifier: Identifier (COB-ID) = 1792 + producer's node address = 1792 + 1 = 1793 = 0x701 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 720: Emergency Telegram

    Error messages of the operating system Corresponding error-free message: Value "0x00000000"  Tip! A detalied description can be found in CAN specification DS301, V4.02. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 721: Canopen Objects Implemented

    COB-ID client −> server (rx) COB-ID server −> client (tx) I-1201 SDO2 server parameter Highest subindex supported COB-ID client −> server (rx) COB-ID server −> client (tx) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 722 C00409/13...16 C00866/13...16 I-1800 TPDO1 communication parameter Highest subindex supported COB-ID used by TPDO C00355/2 Transmission type C00322/1 Inhibit time C00324/2 Event timer C00356/5 C00369 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 723 C00868/9...12 I-1A03 TPDO4 mapping parameter (from version 16.00.00) Number of mapped application objects in PDO 1 ... 4 Application object 1 ... 4 C00868/13...16 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 724 Bit 7 Bit 6 Bit 5 Bit 4 Bit 3 Bit 2 Bit 1 Bit 0 Error status No error Device error message Communication error Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 725 0x11 for transmission. 0x8210 PDO length shorter than expected 0x11 0x8220 PDO length greater than expected 0x11 0x8700 Monitoring of the sync telegram 0x11 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 726 I-1006. Writing identifiers To receive PDOs, the value 0x80 must be entered in the 11-bit identifier in the Lenze setting (and according to CANopen specification) . This means that all modules are by default set to the same sync telegram.
  • Page 727 0 Emergency object is valid. 1 Emergency object is invalid.  Note! The identifier can only be changed in the "emergency object invalid" status (bit 31 = 1). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 728 Bit 31 ... bit 24 Bit 23 ... Bit 16 Bit 15 ... Bit 0 Node ID Heartbeat time (Reserved) in [ms] [11-4] Data telegram assignment Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 729 84003 8400 HighLine C 84004 8400 TopLine C 8400 protec StateLine 8400 protec HighLine 8400 protec EMS Main and subversion of firmware Serial number Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 730 Extended identifier* 11-bit identifier * The extended identifier is not supported. Bit 11 ... bit 29 must be set to "0". [11-5] Data telegram assignment Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 731 • The SDO server parameter is only valid, if bit 31 is set to "0" for both transmission directions (subindex 1 and 2). • In the Lenze setting, the SDO server channels 2 are deactivated (bit 31 = "1"). • The identifier can only be changed if the SDO is invalid (bit 31 = "1").
  • Page 732 Data 1 Data 2 Data 3 Data 4 0x23 0x01 0x12 0x02 0xC4 0x05 0x00 0x00 [11-10] User data assignment for writing to subindex 2 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 733 RTR to this PDO possible (cannot be set) RTR to this PDO not possible (Lenze) PDO active PDO not active [11-12] I-1400 ... I-1402, subindex 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 734 How to change the identifier: 1. Deactivate identifier (set bit 31 to "1"). 2. Change identifier. 3. Activate identifier (set bit 31 to "0"). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 735 How to change the identifier: 1. Deactivate identifier (set bit 31 to "1"). 2. Change identifier. 3. Activate identifier (set bit 31 to "0"). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 736 How to change the identifier: 1. Deactivate identifier (set bit 31 to "1"). 2. Change identifier. 3. Activate identifier (set bit 31 to "0"). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 737 IEC 61131 process data words are mapped. Only whole bytes can be mapped (1-byte/mapping entry). Related topics: RPDO1 | "LP_CanIn1" port block ( 685) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 738 • The 4th mapping entry is used for the statistic mapping. For this, there is no value available. • For data telegram assignment, see object I-1600. Related topics: RPDO3 | "LP_CanIn3" port block ( 689) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 739 • The 4th mapping entry is used for the statistic mapping. For this, there is no value available. • For data telegram assignment, see object I-1600. Related topics: RPDO4 | "LP_CanIn4" port block ( 691) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 740 How to change the identifier: 1. Deactivate identifier (set bit 31 to "1"). 2. Change identifier. 3. Activate identifier (set bit 31 to "0"). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 741 For cyclic operation (transmission type 254), the cycle time for sending the process data object on the system bus can be set under subindex 5: The entered value corresponds to the time in [ms]. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 742 How to change the identifier: 1. Deactivate identifier (set bit 31 to "1"). 2. Change identifier. 3. Activate identifier (set bit 31 to "0"). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 743 How to change the identifier: 1. Deactivate identifier (set bit 31 to "1"). 2. Change identifier. 3. Activate identifier (set bit 31 to "0"). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 744 How to change the identifier: 1. Deactivate identifier (set bit 31 to "1"). 2. Change identifier. 3. Activate identifier (set bit 31 to "0"). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 745 • The 4th mapping entry is used for the statistic mapping. For this, there is no value available. • For data telegram assignment, see object I-1A00. Related topics: TPDO2 | "LP_CanOut2" port block ( 694) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 746 • The 4th mapping entry is used for the statistic mapping. For this, there is no value available. • For data telegram assignment, see object I-1A00. Related topics: TPDO4 | "LP_CanOut4" port block ( 696) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 747: Internal Interfaces | System Block "Ls_Canmanagement

    Hence, 1 second after the "Bus off" has occurred, the inverter will automatically be active again on the system bus ("Auto bus off recovery"). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 748: Profibus/Profinet Option

    The archived data can be addressed by all bus systems supported by the inverter.  The codes of the corresponding communication option are described in the respective online help and in the communication manual (KHB). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 749: Process Data Transfer

    • The process data are not saved in the inverter. [12-1] External and internal data transfer between bus system, inverter and function block interconnection Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 750 • the signal mapping of the PDOs. • The process data objects (e.g. the meaning of the control word bits or the speed setpoint stipulated) are interpreted in the inverter. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 751: Control Mode "Mci

    The predefined assignment of the MCI-PDOs can be parameterised by means of PDO mapping and can be freely configured on the I/O level in the function block editor (FB editor). Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 752: Port Block "Lp_Mciin

    Lenze setting C00876/1 LP_MciIn:wCtrl C00876/2...16 LP_MciIn: wIn2 ... wIn16 C00890/1 LP_MciIn: Inversion bCtrl_B0..15 0x0000 C00890/3 LP_MciIn: Inversion bIn2_B0..15 0x0000 Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 753: Port Block "Lp_Mciout

    Lenze setting C00877/1 LP_MciOut:wState C00877/2...16 LP_MciOut: wOut2 ... wOut16 C00890/2 LP_MciOut: Inversion bState_B0..15 0x0000 C00890/4 LP_MciOut: Inversion bOut2_B0..15 0x0000 Greyed out = display parameter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 754: Can Gateway

    • The parameters of the communication option (C13000 ... C13999) are always processed in the own inverter. • The parameters C00387/1 (CAN gateway address) and C00350 (CAN node address) are not transferred to the remote device. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 755: Synchronisation Of The Internal Time Base

    Example: For the CAN bus, 2 ms has been selected as interval between two synchronisation signals. If the CAN bus is to be used as synchronisation source, a cycle time setpoint of 2000 μs must be selected in C01121. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 756: Internal Interfaces | System Block "Ls_Syncmanagement

    The SB LS_SyncManagement provides status information for synchronising the internal time base: Outputs Designator Value/meaning Data type bSyncSignalOK TRUE Sync signal OK BOOL bSyncPhaseOK TRUE Sync phase position OK BOOL Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 757: Drive-Based Safety

    Detailed information on technical data and electrical installation of the integrated safety system can be found in the mounting instructions of 8400 protec HighLine. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 758: Selection Of The Safety Option

     Detailed information on safe parameter setting of the integrated safety system can be found in the online documentation "Integrated safety". Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 759: Integration Into The Application

    The required error acknowledgement (AIE) is possible via the safety bus and with SO30 via the error acknowledgement input (plug X62). Related topics: Transferring the control information to the application ( 762) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 760: Internal Interfaces | System Block "Ls_Sminterface

    Integrated safety system in error status (trouble or warning). Bits not listed are reserved for future extensions! [14-1] Bit coding of the status signal wState Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 761: I/O Status Information

    See the following subchapter "Transferring the control information to the application". ( 762) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 762: Transferring The Control Information To The Application

    C02610/3. Additional functions are in preparation. Related topics: Interface to safety system ( 483) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 763: Interconnection Examples

    The L_SMStateDecoder_1 function block decodes the status signal assigned to the wState input into single boolean status signals for further use in the FB interconnection. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 764 The L_SMStateDecoderIO_1 function block decodes the status signal assigned to the wIOState input into single boolean status signals for further use in the FB interconnection. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 765 The L_SMControlDecoder_1 function block decodes the control signal assigned to the wControl input into single boolean control signals for further use in the FB interconnection. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 766: Parameter Change-Over

     Motor data changeover  Motor changeover (e.g. via motor contactors) [15-1] Principle of the selective control of multiple motors using one inverter Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 767: Configuring Parameter Change-Over Via The "Engineer" Parameterisation Dialog

    If you do not require this basic function anymore, delete the composed parameter list in order that no unwanted parameter write operations take place. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 768: Configuring The Parameter List(S)

    WriteParamList. • Here, you can use the <Ctrl> key and the<Shift> key for multiple selection, as in the case of general Windows functions. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 769 ( 774) • The preset values are changed in the same way as the definable parameter list. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 770 For cross-device reuse of the configured WriteParamList, you can click on the Export and Import buttons to save the parameter selection as an *.epc file and then to re-import the saved *.epc file into another 8400 inverter. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 771: Configuring Control Inputs

    Value set used FALSE FALSE Value set 1 TRUE FALSE Value set 2 FALSE TRUE Value set 3 TRUE TRUE Value set 4 15.1.3 Functional settings Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 772: Error Message

    • The parameter list will always be processed from beginning to end, even if errors occur in the meantime. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 773: Configuring The Definable Parameter List By Means Of Parameterisation

    The decision as to which value set is finally used is dependent upon the assignment of the two bSelectWriteValue_1 and bSelectWriteValue_2 inputs: Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 774: Configuring The Motor Data Parameter List By Means Of Parameterisation

    • Unlike the "definable" parameter list, the motor data parameter list has a fixed assignment to the motor and control parameters. • The preset values for value sets 1 ... 4 correspond to the Lenze setting of the respective motor or control parameter.
  • Page 775 C02305/11 C02305/12 C02853/4 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/13 C02305/14 C02305/15 C02305/16 C02853/5 PSM: Lss saturation characteristic 100 % C02305/17 C02305/18 C02305/19 C02305/20 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 776 C02311/4 C02874/1 PLI without motion 0x0001 C02312/1 C02312/2 C02312/3 C02312/4 C02875/1 PLI without motion: Adaptation of ident angle 0 ° C02313/1 C02313/2 C02313/3 C02313/4 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 777: Internal Interfaces | System Block "Ls_Writeparamlist

    BOOL Value_1 Value_2 FALSE FALSE Value set 1 TRUE FALSE Value set 2 FALSE TRUE Value set 3 TRUE TRUE Value set 4 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 778 3. An error has occurred (if bFail = TRUE). bFail "Error" status BOOL TRUE An error has occurred (group signal). • See display parameter (C01083) for details. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 779: Parameter Reference

    "Introduction: Parameterising the inverter". ( 27) For general information on how to read and change parameters, please see the online documentation for the »Engineer«. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 780: Structure Of The Parameter Descriptions

    • Parameters with read-only access • Parameters with write access Table footer The table footer contains the Parameter attributes. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 781: Data Type

    Scaling factor: 1 Representation in the »Engineer« The »Engineer« displays these parameters with a grey background or, with an online connection, with a pale-yellow background: Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 782: Parameters With Write Access

    (Lenze setting printed in bold)  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 783: Parameters With Bit-Coded Setting

    The »Engineer« uses a dialog box for parameter setting in which the individual bits can be set or reset. Alternatively, the value can be entered as a decimal or hexadecimal value: Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 784: Parameters With Subcodes

     COM Communication-relevant parameter • This parameter is relevant for parameter data transfer via the (CAN) system bus.  MOT Motor control parameters Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 785 In case of parameters of "VISIBLE_STRING" data type, the character length is given in addition. This is also important for the parameter access via a bus system. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

  • Page 786: Parameter List

    1 On / start 4 Action cancelled 5 No access 6 No access controller inhibit 20 20% working 40 40% working 60 60% working 80 80% working Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 787 • All entries in the logbook of the inverter are deleted. • In the logbook, information on the error history is saved. Logbook C00002/22 0: Off / ready Reserved Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 788 From version 06.00.00 Password protection  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 789 TA "Switch-off positioning"  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 790 • For setting the V/f characteristic, only the rated frequency (C00089) and the rated voltage (C00090) of the motor have to be entered. V/f characteristic control Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 791 Selection list Info (read only) 0 Free|Free Application: Interconnection has been changed. I/O level: Interconnection has been changed. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 792 I/O level: "Keypad" control mode 2021 TabPos|PC Application: Table positioning I/O level: "PC" control mode 2030 TabPos|CAN Application: Table positioning I/O level: "CAN" control mode Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 793 100.00 % AIN1: (-xmax)  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 794 2600.0 50.0 Hz  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 10 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 795 33 16 kHz var./min. Pv/8 kHz min  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 796 100.00 100.00 %  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 797 1.0000 AIN1: Gain  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 10000 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 798 AIN1: Output value  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 799 C00039/6 0.00 % Fixed setpoint 6 C00039/7 0.00 % Fixed setpoint 7 C00039/8 0.00 % Fixed setpoint 8 C00039/9 0.00 % Fixed setpoint 9 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 800 (min. value | unit | max. value) 1000  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 801 (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.00 65000.00  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 802 • If the value displayed here exceeds the threshold set in C00123, the error message "OC5: Device overload (Ixt)" is output and the "Fault" error response is returned. Display range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.00 250.00 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 803 C00071 | Ti speed controller Reset time Ti of the speed controller for different motor control types Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 6000.0 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 804 SLVC: Ti torque controller  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 805 6000.0 256.0 ms  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 10 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 806 500.00 11.00 kW  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 807 60000 1460 rpm  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 808 6500.0 81.0 mH  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 10 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 809 Display of the firmware version of the device as string  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC-STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Character length: 12 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 810 Add. decel. time 1 ... 15 C00103/... C00103/15  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1000 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 811 Quick stop setting From version 16.00.00  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 812 Inversion of digital input 5 Bit 5  DI6 invert. Inversion of digital input 6 Bit 6  Reserved Bit 7  Reserved Bit 8  Reserved Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 813 3 DO1 DO2 active; DI3 DI4 inactive  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 814 Initial value motor overload (I²xt)  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 815 Resistance value of the connected brake resistor • The value to be entered can be obtained from the nameplate of the brake resistor. • For each device type, the value is preset to the adapted minimum Lenze brake resistance. Setting range Lenze setting (min.
  • Page 816 = 5F77 C00136 | Communication control words Control words of the communication interfaces Display area (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 817 • Control word of the CAN communication interface (X31/X32)  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 818 14 Reserved_3 15 Reserved_4  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 819 "Trouble" or "Fault" can be parameterised individually.  Danger! In the Lenze setting, the autostart option "Inhibit at power-on" is deactivated, i. e. the motor can directly start up if the controller is enabled after mains connection! Automatic restart after mains connection/fault...
  • Page 820 Bit 6  Warning Bit 7  ImpIsActive Bit 8  CInhIsActive Bit 9  Fail CAN_Management Bit 10  Reserved Bit 11  Reserved Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 821 Bit 15 FreeStatus Free status bit 15  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 822 C00158 | Cause of controller inhibit Bit coded display of the cause/source of the controller inhibit Display area (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 823 Bit 14 Reserved Bit 15 Reserved  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 824 Selection of two binary signals to be logged in the logbook Selection list Info 0 No signal 1 DI1: Input signal 2 DI2: Input signal Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 825 42 CAN3 input bit 3 43 CAN3 input bit 4 44 CAN3 input bit 5 45 CAN3 input bit 6 46 CAN3 input bit 7 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 826 85 MCI word2 input bit14 86 MCI word2 input bit15 87 Position controller: Limit 88 Speed controller: Limit 89 Speed setpoint: Limit 90 Torque setpoint: Limit Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 827 9 CAN2 input word 4 10 CAN3 input word 1 11 CAN3 input word 2 12 CAN3 input word 3 13 CAN3 input word 4 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 828 Logbook - analog element 1  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 829 (min. value | unit | max. value) 4294967295  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 830 C00171 | Logbook access index Index: 24404 = 5F54 This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 831 Braking is performed by combining all three braking procedures.  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 832 (min. value | unit | max. value) 2147483647  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 833 600 3 s  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 834 All "locking" error messages are reset automatically  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 835 Logbook access index User  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 836 • From version 12.00.00  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC-STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Character length: 32 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 837 Subcodes Info C00204/1 Serial no.: Control card C00204/2 Serial no.: Power section C00204/3 Serial no.: MCI module C00204/4 Reserved C00204/5 Serial no.: Memory module Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 838 999.999 0.000 s  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1000 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 839 199.99 199.99 %  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 840 L_PCTRL_1: Neg. maximum  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 841 100.00 0.50 %  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 842 (min. value | unit | max. value) -199.99 199.99  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 843 5000 1000 ms  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 844 1000.0 200.0 Hz  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 10 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 845 1000.0 1.0 ms  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 10 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 846 = 5ED6 C00297 | Counter Receive Error Isr This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 847 Data type: UNSIGNED_16 Index: 24265 = 5EC9 C00310 | PartitionValue This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 848 Index: 24255 = 5EBF C00320 | Debug information This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 849 From version 16.00.00  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 850 From version 16.00.00  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 851 Selection of the events for which the bFail error output of the LS_CANMAnagement SB must be set to TRUE. Setting range Lenze setting (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF 0x0000 (decimal: 0) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 852 Configuration defining the events that lead to a decoupling of the process data words. Configuring exception handling of the CAN PDOs Setting range (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 853 C00343/5 LP_CanIn2:wIn1 DiscVal C00343/6 LP_CanIn2:wIn2 DiscVal C00343/7 LP_CanIn2:wIn3 DiscVal C00343/8 LP_CanIn2:wIn4 DiscVal C00343/9 LP_CanIn3:wIn1 DiscVal C00343/10 LP_CanIn3:wIn2 DiscVal C00343/11 LP_CanIn3:wIn3 DiscVal C00343/12 LP_CanIn3:wIn4 DiscVal Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 854 From version 16.00.00  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 855 = 5EA2 DIP switch setting during last mains power-on CANopen Option/CAN on board Display area (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 856 5 20 kbps  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 857 Bit 31 PDO invalid Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00354/1 0x00000201 COBID CAN1_IN C00354/2 0x00000181 COBID CAN1_OUT C00354/3 0x00000301 COBID CAN2_IN C00354/4 0x00000281 COBID CAN2_OUT Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 858 3000 ms CAN delay boot-up - operat. • Delay time for NMT state change from "Boot-up" to "Operational". C00356/2 0 ms CAN2_OUT cycle time Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 859 From version 16.00.00  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 860 From version 16.00.00  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 861 Selection of the number of active parameter data channels • In the Lenze setting, only the parameter data channel 1 is activated according to CANopen. • In order to activate both parameter data channels, set the selection "2 SDO Lenze".
  • Page 862 Bit 14  Reserved Bit 15  Sync-transmit off  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 863 C00372/4 CAN Rx_Overflow  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 864 C00387/1 CAN_Gateway: Addr.  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 865 Inversion of LP_CanOut4.bOut1_B0...15 • From version 16.00.00  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 866 Mapping for port blocks LP_CanIn1...3 CAN port block Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 65535 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00409/1 LP_CanIn1:wCtrl MapVal C00409/2 LP_CanIn1:wIn2 MapVal Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 867 Signal source for output bOut4  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 868 FreqIn56: Number of encoder increments  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 869 C00425 | Encoder scanning time Encoder sample time for the digital input terminals when configured as frequency inputs Using DI1(5) and DI2(6) as frequency inputs Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 870 In version 8.00.00 and from version 16.00.00 onwards  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 871 C00429 | Advanced settings Index: 24146 = 5E52 SSI encoder evaluation Setting range (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF Value is bit-coded: Info Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 872 Bit 6 Linear data overflow SSI Bit 7 Max. encoder speed Bit 8 Reserved Bit 9 Reserved Bit 10 Reserved Bit 11 Reserved Bit 12 Reserved Bit 13 Reserved Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 873 DIx: Terminal level C00443/2 DIx: Output level  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 874 FreqIn12_nOut_v C00445/2 FreqIn56_nOut_v  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 875 Bit 14  Reserved Bit 15  Reserved  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 876 C00451 | LS_MultiEncoder: bFail information In version 8.00.00 and from version 16.00.00 onwards Display area (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 877 Index: 24120 = 5E38 C00455 | FB_call table This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 878 Remote: Monitoring counter  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 879 Info C00463/1 0x00000000 Remote: MCK control  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 880 Index: 24107 = 5E2B C00468 | Service code This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 881 Value for output wPar1 ... wPar32 C00471/... C00471/32  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 882 C00474 | LS_ParFree_p SB LS_ParFree_p: Setting of the position signals to be output Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -2147483647 Incr. 2147483647 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 883 Value for output nC476_16_a  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 884 Values for output dnC479_1 ... dnC479_8 C00479/... C00479/8  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 885 Input values nDis1_a ... nDis8_a C00482/... C00482/8  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 886 Application unit 4: Display factor  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 10000 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 887 • Selection of edge or level for starting slow-down function 1 C00488/2 0: Level InputSens.Stop1 • Selection of edge or level for stop function 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 888 5 Encoder signal FreqIn1256  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 889 Bit 0 Only access to user menu The menus in the keypad are reduced. Only the user menu can be used to change parameters. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 890 1 and bit 2 indicate the active protection always with regard to the communication channel used. Device access protection Display area (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 891 Bit 5 Reserved Bit 6 Reserved Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 Reserved Bit 9 Reserved Bit 10 Reserved Bit 11 Reserved Bit 12 Reserved Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 892 0x0006 PW protection config X1 (CAN)  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 893 • If "0.000" is set, no entry will be displayed in the user menu. Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.000 16000.000 Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00517/1 51.000 C00051: Display of actual speed value Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 894 = 5DCF C00560 | Fan switching status Display of the function status of the device fans Selection list 0 Off 1 On 2 No fan Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 895 1 Fault 5 Warning  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 896 C00570 | Resp. to controller limitations Configuration of monitoring of the motor control (group 2) Selection list 0 No Reaction 1 Fault 5 Warning Subcodes Lenze setting Info Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 897 C00574 | Resp. to brake resist. overtemp. Response which is triggered if the threshold set in C00572 for monitoring brake resistor utilisation is reached. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 898 6200.0 20.0 ms  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 10 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 899 LS_SetError_2: Resp. to bSetError4  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 900 1 Fault 5 Warning  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 901 C00592 | Resp. to CAN bus connection Index: 23983 = 5DAF Configuration of monitoring of the CAN interface (group 1) CANopen Option/CAN on board Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 902 From version 16.00.00  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 903 C00595/10 4: WarningLocked Response to implausible profile set data C00595/11 5: Warning Response to the selection of an invalid operating mode of the MCK Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 904 Resp. to IO supply overload  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 905 0 No Reaction 1 Fault  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 906 1 Fault 5 Warning  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 907 = 5D96 C00617 | 32-bit connection table AdditionalFBsHL This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 908 C00620/33 0: Not connected LP_MciOut: wOut12 C00620/34 0: Not connected LP_MciOut: wOut13 C00620/35 0: Not connected LP_MciOut: wOut14 C00620/36 0: Not connected LP_MciOut: wOut15 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 909 0: Not connected Reserved C00620/77 0: Not connected Reserved C00620/78 0: Not connected Reserved C00620/79 0: Not connected Reserved C00620/80 0: Not connected Reserved Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 910 • The selection list contains all binary output signals which can be assigned to the binary inputs mapped by the subcodes. Selection list selection list - digital signals Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00621/1 0: Not connected Reserved C00621/2 1000: LA_NCtrl: bDriveReady LS_DigitalOutput: bOut1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 911 C00621/43 0: Not connected LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B14 C00621/44 0: Not connected LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B15 C00621/45 0: Not connected LP_CanOut3: bOut1_B0 C00621/46 0: Not connected LP_CanOut3: bOut1_B1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 912 C00621/87 0: Not connected LP_MciOut: bOut2_B10 C00621/88 0: Not connected LP_MciOut: bOut2_B11 C00621/89 0: Not connected LP_MciOut: bOut2_B12 C00621/90 0: Not connected LP_MciOut: bOut2_B13 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 913 0: Not connected Reserved C00621/131 0: Not connected Reserved C00621/132 0: Not connected Reserved C00621/133 0: Not connected Reserved C00621/134 0: Not connected Reserved Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 914 0: Not connected Reserved C00621/175 0: Not connected Reserved C00621/176 0: Not connected Reserved C00621/177 0: Not connected Reserved C00621/178 0: Not connected Reserved Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 915 C00622/9 0: Not connected LP_CanOut1: dnOut34_p C00622/10 0: Not connected LP_CanOut2: dnOut34_p C00622/11 0: Not connected LP_CanOut3: dnOut34_p C00622/12 0: Not connected LP_MciOut: dnOut34_p Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 916 2147483647 incr. L_LimitPhi_3: Max.Limit  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 917 1 ≡ Speed setpoint is at the maximum speed limit Bit 6 MinLimit active 1 ≡ Speed setpoint is at the minimum speed limit Bit 7 Reserved Bit 8 Reserved Bit 9 Reserved Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 918 (min. value | unit | max. value) -199.99 199.99  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 919 3 nOut_a = (nIn1_a * nIn2_a) / 100% 4 nOut_a = (nIn1_a * 1%) / |nIn2_a| 5 nOut_a = (nIn1_a * 100%) / (100% - nIn2_a) Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 920 The new process signal nSpeedSetValueInertia_a at LS_MotorInterface can be used to define any input value (e.g. position or process controller setpoint) for torque feedforward control. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 921 Index: 23914 = 5D6A From version 02.00.00 FB L_FixSet_w_1: Setting of the fixed values Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 65535 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 922 -100.0000 100.0000 1.0000  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 10000 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 923 = 5D59 C00678 | L_GainOffsetPhiP 1-2: Parameter Gain and offset Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) -2147483647 2147483647 Subcodes Lenze setting Info Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 924 100.00 0.50 %  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 925 100.00 2.00 %  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 926 1: In1 = In2 L_Compare_5: Function  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 927 199.99 0.00 %  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 928 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: nGPMulDivIn_a Input for analog signal for multiplication/division C00700/14 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: nGPCompareIn1_a Input for comparison operation - analog signal 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 929 C00701/3 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bSetQuickstop Control input for quick stop request C00701/4 16002: LS_DigitalInput: bIn3 LA_NCtrl: bSetDCBrake Control input for DC-injection braking request Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 930 C00701/26 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bGPLogicIn2 Input signal 2 for digital logic C00701/27 0: Not connected LA_NCtrl: bGPLogicIn3 Input signal 3 for digital logic Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 931 = 5D3E C00705 | LA_NCtrl_Out: Analog signal list This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 932 0: Not connected LA_TabPos: nGPMulDivIn_a Input for analog signal for multiplication/division C00710/17 0: Not connected LA_TabPos: nGPCompareIn1_a Input for comparison operation - analog signal 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 933 0: Not connected LA_TabPos: bSetQuickstop Control input for quick stop request C00711/4 0: Not connected LA_TabPos: bSetSpeedCcw Control input for negation of speed direction Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 934 0: Not connected LA_TabPos: bPosExecute Control input for positioning start C00711/27 0: Not connected LA_TabPos: bPosFinishTarget Control input for completion of positioning to target position Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 935 C00711/49 0: Not connected LA_TabPos: bFreeIn1 Input for binary user signal 1 C00711/50 0: Not connected LA_TabPos: bFreeIn2 Input for binary user signal 2 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 936 = 5D32 C00717 | LA_TabPos_Out: phi signal list This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 937 • When a variable switching frequency is selected in C00018, the switching frequency may change as a function of the load and rotational frequency. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 938 1 ≡ request quick stop C00727/2 1 ≡ request DC-injection braking C00727/3 1 ≡ request change of direction of rotation C00727/4 1 ≡ request fixed speed setpoint 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 939 C00732 | Oscilloscope command Index: 23843 = 5D23 This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 940 Index: 23829 = 5D15 C00746 | Oscilloscope trigger counter This code is for device-internal use only and must not be written to by the user! Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 941 0: Not connected LA_SwitchPos: wMCIDriveControl Input for control word from communication interface to device control C00760/3 0: Not connected LA_SwitchPos: nVoltageAdd_a Input for additive voltage impression Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 942 Input for user signal 4  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 943 0: Not connected LA_SwitchPos: bJogCtrlSlowDown3 Control input for selection of pre-switch off 3 C00761/19 0: Not connected LA_SwitchPos: bJogCtrlStop3 Control input for stop function 3 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 944 C00761/44 0: Not connected LA_SwitchPos: bFreeIn5 Input for binary user signal 5 C00761/45 0: Not connected LA_SwitchPos: bFreeIn6 Input for binary user signal 6 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 945 199.99 -100.00 %  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 946 2 Load 0  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 947 C00809 | L_NLim_2: Max.SkipFrq. Index: 23766 = 5CD6 FB L_NLim_2: Maximum skip frequencies Setting range (min. value | unit | max. value) 0.00 199.99 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 948 Data type: UNSIGNED_16 Index: 23763 = 5CD3 C00812 | L_NLim: Current status From version 12.00.00 Display area (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 949 0 False 1 True Subcodes Lenze setting Info C00821/1 0: FALSE L_DigitalLogic_1: bOut: bIn3...bIn1=0 0 0 C00821/2 0: FALSE L_DigitalLogic_1: bOut: bIn3...bIn1=0 0 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 950 = 5CC8 C00823 | L_DigitalLogic_2: Truth table L_DigitalLogic_2 FB: Parameterisation of the truth table Selection list 0 False 1 True Subcodes Lenze setting Info Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 951 = 5CC6 C00825 | L_DigitalLogic5_1: Truth table FB L_DigitalLogic5_1: Parameter setting of the truth table Selection list 0 False 1 True Subcodes Lenze setting Info Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 952 C00827 is used.  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 953 L_DigitalLogic5_2: bIn5...bIn1=1 1 1 1 1  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 954 C00829/18 0: FALSE L_DigitalLogic_3: bOut3: bIn3...bIn1=0 0 1 C00829/19 0: FALSE L_DigitalLogic_3: bOut3: bIn3...bIn1=0 1 0 C00829/20 0: FALSE L_DigitalLogic_3: bOut3: bIn3...bIn1=0 1 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 955 MCTRL: nSpeedLowLimit_a C00830/24 MCTRL: nSpeedCtrlI_a C00830/25 MCTRL: nSpeedCtrlPAdapt_a C00830/26 MCTRL: nBoost_a C00830/27 MCTRL: nTorqueSetValue_a C00830/28 MCTRL: nTorqueGenLimit_a C00830/29 MCTRL: nTorqueMotLimit_a C00830/30 Reserved C00830/31 MCTRL: nVoltageAdd_a Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 956 C00830/68 MCK: nMBrakeAddValue_a C00830/69 MCK: nTorqueSetValue_a C00830/70 MCK: nTorqueLimitAdapt_a C00830/71 MCK: nSRampOverride_a C00830/72 MCK: nSpeedSetValue_a C00830/73 MCK: wMotionCtrl2 C00830/74 MCK: wMotionCtrl1 C00830/75 MCK: nSpeedOverride_a Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 957 C00831 | 16-bit inputs Decimal/hexadecimal/bit coded display of 16 bit input values of various blocks Display area (min. hex value | max. hex value) 0x0000 0xFFFF Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 958 C00831/32 MCTRL: nPWMAngleOffset_a C00831/33 L_NSet_1: nCInhVal_a C00831/34 L_NSet_1: nNSet_a C00831/35 L_NSet_1: nSet_a C00831/36 L_NSet_1: nNAdd_a C00831/37 DCTRL: wCANControl C00831/38 DCTRL: wMCIControl C00831/39 L_NLim_1: nIn_a Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 959 C00831/75 MCK: nSpeedOverride_a C00831/76 MCK: nAccOverride_a C00831/77 MCK: nSpeedAdd_v C00831/78 MCK: wAuxCtrl C00831/79 MCK: wSMCtrl C00831/80 L_OffsetGainP_3: nIn_a C00831/81 L_MPot_1: nIn_a C00831/82 L_MulDiv_1: nIn_a Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 960 C00832/2 L_AddSub_1: nIn1_a C00832/3 L_AddSub_1: nIn2_a C00832/4 L_AddSub_1: nIn3_a C00832/5 L_OffsetGain_1: nIn_a C00832/6 L_OffsetGain_1: nOffset_a C00832/7 L_OffsetGain_1: nGain_a C00832/8 L_Negation_1: nIn_a C00832/9 L_GainOffset_1: nIn_a Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 961 L_AnalogSwitch_2: nIn1_a C00832/46 L_AnalogSwitch_2: nIn2_a C00832/47 L_AnalogSwitch_3: nIn1_a C00832/48 L_AnalogSwitch_3: nIn2_a C00832/49 L_Arithmetik_2: nIn1_a C00832/50 L_Arithmetik_2: nIn2_a C00832/51 Reserved C00832/52 Reserved C00832/53 L_GainOffset_2: nIn_a Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 962 C00832/87 L_PT1_1: nIn_a C00832/88 MCTRL: nSpeedHighLimit_a C00832/89 L_PCTRL_1: nNSet_a C00832/90 L_PCTRL_1: nISet_a C00832/91 L_Interpolator_1: nPhdIn_v C00832/92 L_Interpolator_1: nNIn_a C00832/93 L_SMStateDecoder_1: wState C00832/94 L_SMStateDecoderIO_1: wIOState Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 963 C00833/16 L_NSet_1: bNSetInv C00833/17 L_NSet_1: bJog1 C00833/18 L_NSet_1: bJog2 C00833/19 L_NSet_1: bJog4 C00833/20 L_NSet_1: bJog8 C00833/21 L_NSet_1: bTi1 C00833/22 L_NSet_1: bTi2 C00833/23 L_NSet_1: bTi4 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 964 C00833/60 L_Or_3: bIn3 C00833/61 L_Not_2: bIn C00833/62 L_Not_3: bIn C00833/63 L_DigitalLogic_1: bIn1 C00833/64 L_DigitalLogic_1: bIn2 C00833/65 L_DigitalLogic_1: bIn3 C00833/66 L_DigitalDelay_1: bIn C00833/67 MCTRL: bPosDerivativeOn Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 965 LS_DataAccess: bEnableIn1 (Lenze-internal) C00833/103 LS_DataAccess: bEnableIn2 (Lenze-internal) C00833/104 LS_DataAccess: bEnableIn3 (Lenze-internal) C00833/105 LS_DataAccess: bEnableIn4 (Lenze-internal) C00833/106 L_PCTRL_1: bEnableInfluenceRamp C00833/107 LS_SetError_2: bSetError1 C00833/108 LS_SetError_2: bSetError2 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 966 C00834/1 MCK: dnPosSetValue_p C00834/2 MCK: dnMotorRefOffset_p C00834/3 MCK: dnDeltaPos_p C00834/4 MCTRL: dnDeltaPos_p C00834/5 MCTRL: dnPosSetValue_p C00834/6 MCTRL: dnMotorRefOffset_p C00834/7 MCK: dnProfilePosition_p C00834/8 L_Interpolator_1: dnPhiIn_p Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 967 C00835/24 L_OffsetGain_3: nOffset_a C00835/25 L_OffsetGain_3: nGain_a C00835/26 L_PT1_2: nIn_a C00835/27 L_PT1_3: nIn_a C00835/28 L_PhaseIntK_2: nIn_v C00835/29 L_SampleHold_1: nIn_a C00835/30 L_SampleHold_2: nIn_a C00835/31 L_Mux_1: wInSelect Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 968 C00835/68 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_3: wInLWord C00835/69 L_ConvUnitsToIncr_3: wInHWord C00835/70 L_Curve_1: nIn_a C00835/71 L_ConvW_1: wIn C00835/72 L_ConvW_2: wIn C00835/73 L_ConvW_3: wIn C00835/74 L_ConvW_4: wIn C00835/75 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: wPosSetHW Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 969 C00835/112 L_DFSET_1: wGearNum C00835/113 L_DFSET_1: wGainNum C00835/114 L_DFSET_1: nSet_v C00835/115 L_DFSET_1: wGainDenom C00835/116 L_DFSET_1: wGearDenom C00835/117 L_DFSET_1: nPositionTrimming C00835/118 L_DFSET_1: nNAct_v C00835/119 L_DFRFG_1: nIn_v Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 970 Reserved C00835/162 Reserved  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 100 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 971 C00836/27 L_PT1_3: nIn_a C00836/28 L_PhaseIntK_2: nIn_v C00836/29 L_SampleHold_1: nIn_a C00836/30 L_SampleHold_2: nIn_a C00836/31 L_Mux_1: wInSelect C00836/32 L_GainOffset_3: nIn_a C00836/33 L_GainOffset_3: nGain_a C00836/34 L_GainOffset_3: nOffset_a Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 972 C00836/71 L_ConvW_1: wIn C00836/72 L_ConvW_2: wIn C00836/73 L_ConvW_3: wIn C00836/74 L_ConvW_4: wIn C00836/75 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: wPosSetHW C00836/76 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: wPosSetLW C00836/77 L_PhaseDiff_1: nIn_v C00836/78 L_PhaseDiff_2: nIn_v Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 973 C00836/115 L_DFSET_1: wGainDenom C00836/116 L_DFSET_1: wGearDenom C00836/117 L_DFSET_1: nPositionTrimming C00836/118 L_DFSET_1: nNAct_v C00836/119 L_DFRFG_1: nIn_v C00836/120 L_GearComp_1: nTorque_a C00836/121 L_ConvAP_1: nIn_a C00836/122 L_ConvAP_2: nIn_a Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 974 C00836/160 Reserved C00836/161 Reserved C00836/162 Reserved  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 975 C00837/31 L_Mux_1: wInSelect C00837/32 L_GainOffset_3: nIn_a C00837/33 L_GainOffset_3: nGain_a C00837/34 L_GainOffset_3: nOffset_a C00837/35 L_MulDiv_2: nIn_a C00837/36 L_DT1_1: nIn_a C00837/37 L_Counter_1: wLdVal C00837/38 L_Counter_1: wCmpVal Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 976 C00837/75 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: wPosSetHW C00837/76 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: wPosSetLW C00837/77 L_PhaseDiff_1: nIn_v C00837/78 L_PhaseDiff_2: nIn_v C00837/79 L_SRFG_1: nIn_a C00837/80 L_SRFG_2: nIn_a C00837/81 L_SRFG_1: nSet_a C00837/82 L_SRFG_2: nSet_a Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 977 C00837/119 L_DFRFG_1: nIn_v C00837/120 L_GearComp_1: nTorque_a C00837/121 L_ConvAP_1: nIn_a C00837/122 L_ConvAP_2: nIn_a C00837/123 L_ConvAP_3: nIn_a C00837/124 L_ConvX_1: nIn_a C00837/125 L_ConvX_1: nNum C00837/126 L_ConvX_1: wDenom Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 978 C00838 | Binary inputs (Set2) Index: 23737 = 5CB9 Display of the signal status of the binary inputs of different blocks • In addition to the parameter C00833. Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 979 C00838/33 L_NLim_2: bEnable C00838/34 L_Or5_1: bIn1 C00838/35 L_Or5_1: bIn2 C00838/36 L_Or5_1: bIn3 C00838/37 L_Or5_1: bIn4 C00838/38 L_Or5_1: bIn5 C00838/39 L_Or5_2: bIn1 C00838/40 L_Or5_2: bIn2 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 980 C00838/77 L_ConvBitsToWord_1: bBit10 C00838/78 L_ConvBitsToWord_1: bBit11 C00838/79 L_ConvBitsToWord_1: bBit12 C00838/80 L_ConvBitsToWord_1: bBit13 C00838/81 L_ConvBitsToWord_1: bBit14 C00838/82 L_ConvBitsToWord_1: bBit15 C00838/83 L_ConvBitsToWord_2: bBit0 C00838/84 L_ConvBitsToWord_2: bBit1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 981 C00838/121 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: bHomingResetPos C00838/122 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: bEnableVelOverride C00838/123 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: bEnableAccOverride C00838/124 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: bDisableSShaping C00838/125 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: bPosExecute C00838/126 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: bPosExecuteFinish C00838/127 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: bPosDisableFollowProfile C00838/128 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: bPosStop Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 982 C00838/165 L_CalcDiameter_1: bUnidirect C00838/166 L_CalcDiameter_1: bUnwind C00838/167 L_CalcDiameter_1: bLoadDiameter C00838/168 L_CalcDiameter_1: bCalcRef C00838/169 L_ProcessCtrl_1: bLoadAct C00838/170 L_ProcessCtrl_1: bIOff C00838/171 L_ProcessCtrl_1: bReset C00838/172 L_PhiIntegrator_1: bTPReceived Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 983 Reserved C00838/213 Reserved  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Scaling factor: 1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 984 C00839/31 L_Mux_1: dnInput6_p C00839/32 L_Mux_1: dnInput7_p C00839/33 L_Mux_1: dnInput8_p C00839/34 L_SQrt_1: dnInput_p C00839/35 L_ConvDIntToWords_1: dnInput_p C00839/36 L_ConvDIntToWords_2: dnInput_p C00839/37 L_ConvDIntToWords_3: dnInput_p C00839/38 L_MckCtrlInterface_1: dnPosSetIn_p Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 985 C00839/73 L_SignalSwitch32_2: dnIn1 C00839/74 L_SignalSwitch32_2: dnIn2 C00839/75 L_SignalSwitch32_3: dnIn1 C00839/76 L_SignalSwitch32_3: dnIn2 C00839/77 Reserved C00839/78 Reserved C00839/79 Reserved C00839/80 Reserved C00839/81 Reserved C00839/82 Reserved Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 986 C00840/14 LS_DisFree_a: nDis1_a C00840/15 LS_DisFree_a: nDis2_a C00840/16 LS_DisFree_a: nDis3_a C00840/17 LS_DisFree_a: nDis4_a C00840/18 LS_DisFree: wDis1 C00840/19 LS_DisFree: wDis2 C00840/20 LS_DisFree: wDis3 C00840/21 LS_DisFree: wDis4 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 987 C00840/58 LS_ParReadWrite_3: wParSubindex C00840/59 LS_ParReadWrite_3: wInHWord C00840/60 LS_ParReadWrite_3: wInLWord C00840/61 LS_ParReadWrite_4: wParIndex C00840/62 LS_ParReadWrite_4: wParSubindex C00840/63 LS_ParReadWrite_4: wInHWord C00840/64 LS_ParReadWrite_4: wInLWord C00840/65 LS_ParReadWrite_5: wParIndex Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 988 C00840/100 Reserved C00840/101 Reserved C00840/102 Reserved C00840/103 Reserved C00840/104 Reserved C00840/105 Reserved C00840/106 LS_MultiEncoder: wActPosExternalHW C00840/107 LS_MultiEncoder: wActPosExternalLW C00840/108 LP_CanOut4: wOut1 C00840/109 LP_CanOut4: wOut2 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 989 C00841/22 LP_MciOut: wState C00841/23 LP_MciOut: wOut2 C00841/24 LP_MciOut: wOut3 C00841/25 LP_MciOut: wOut4 C00841/26 LP_MciOut: wOut5 C00841/27 LP_MciOut: wOut6 C00841/28 LP_MciOut: wOut7 C00841/29 LP_MciOut: wOut8 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 990 C00841/66 LS_ParReadWrite_5: wParSubindex C00841/67 LS_ParReadWrite_5: wInHWord C00841/68 LS_ParReadWrite_5: wInLWord C00841/69 LS_ParReadWrite_6: wParIndex C00841/70 LS_ParReadWrite_6: wParSubindex C00841/71 LS_ParReadWrite_6: wInHWord C00841/72 LS_ParReadWrite_6: wInLWord C00841/73 L_SMStateDecoder_1: wState Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 991 C00841/110 LP_CanOut4: wOut3 C00841/111 LP_CanOut4: wOut4  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 992 C00843/30 LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B1 C00843/31 LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B2 C00843/32 LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B3 C00843/33 LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B4 C00843/34 LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B5 C00843/35 LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B6 C00843/36 LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B7 C00843/37 LP_CanOut2: bOut1_B8 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 993 C00843/74 LP_MciOut: bState_B13 C00843/75 LP_MciOut: bState_B14 C00843/76 LP_MciOut: bState_B15 C00843/77 LP_MciOut: bOut2_B0 C00843/78 LP_MciOut: bOut2_B1 C00843/79 LP_MciOut: bOut2_B2 C00843/80 LP_MciOut: bOut2_B3 C00843/81 LP_MciOut: bOut2_B4 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 994 C00843/118 LS_ParReadWrite_4: bReadWrite C00843/119 LS_ParReadWrite_5: bExecute C00843/120 LS_ParReadWrite_5: bReadWrite C00843/121 LS_ParReadWrite_6: bExecute C00843/122 LS_ParReadWrite_6: bReadWrite C00843/123 LS_WriteParamList: bExecute C00843/124 LS_WriteParamList: bSelectWriteValue_1 C00843/125 LS_WriteParamList: bSelectWriteValue_2 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 995 LS_TouchProbe: bDisableTPDigIn5Window C00843/161 Reserved C00843/162 Reserved C00843/163 Reserved C00843/164 Reserved C00843/165 LS_RetainData: bSetRetain_1 C00843/166 LS_RetainData: bSetRetain_2 C00843/167 LS_RetainData: bSetRetain_3 C00843/168 LS_RetainData: bLoadParams C00843/169 LS_RetainData: bIn1 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 996 (min. value | unit | max. value) -2147483647 Incr. 2147483647 Subcodes Info C00844/1 LS_DisFree_p: dnDis1_p C00844/2 LS_DisFree_p: dnDis2_p C00844/3 LS_DisFree_p: dnDis3_p C00844/4 LS_DisFree_p: dnDis4_p C00844/5 LS_DisFree_p: dnDis5_p Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 997 C00866/3 LP_CanIn1: wIn3 C00866/4 LP_CanIn1: wIn4 C00866/5 LP_CanIn2: wIn1 C00866/6 LP_CanIn2: wIn2 C00866/7 LP_CanIn2: wIn3 C00866/8 LP_CanIn2: wIn4 C00866/9 LP_CanIn3: wIn1 C00866/10 LP_CanIn3: wIn2 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 998 C00868/1 LP_CanOut1: wState C00868/2 LP_CanOut1: wOut2 C00868/3 LP_CanOut1: wOut3 C00868/4 LP_CanOut1: wOut4 C00868/5 LP_CanOut2: wOut1 C00868/6 LP_CanOut2: wOut2 C00868/7 LP_CanOut2: wOut3 C00868/8 LP_CanOut2: wOut4 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 999 C00876/15 LP_MciIn: wIn15 C00876/16 LP_MciIn: wIn16  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...
  • Page 1000 LP_MciIn: Invert. In2_B0..15 C00890/4 0x0000 LP_MciOut: Invert.Out2_B0..15  Read access  Write access  CINH  PLC STOP  No transfer  COM  MOT 1000 Lenze · 8400 protec HighLine · Reference manual · DMS 8.1 EN · 02/2018 · TD23...

Table of Contents